Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In the Revit Architecture model. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. construction. 12 Select DefaultMetric. drawing sheets. and customize the project as necessary. 13 Click OK. You learn the terminology. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. In this case. every drawing sheet. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. and schedules required for a building project. If you move the partition. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is one of association or connection. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. For most tutorial projects. sections. and open Metric\Templates. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. schedules. If the length of the elevation is changed. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the floor or roof remains connected. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction .10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte. review the Revit Architecture templates. In this case. you will use the default template. quantities. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. scope. and residential. the operation of the software is parametric. drawings. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. and plans. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. how to navigate the user interface. the hierarchy of elements. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. hence. and phases when you need it. 2D and 3D view. click Training Files. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and click Open.

For example. For example. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. windows. tags. grids. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the model. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. filled regions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.When you change something. levels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. windows. Examples include detail lines. and roofs are model elements. and reference planes are datum elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. and 2D detail components. doors. and cabinets are model components. Datum elements help to define project context. and keynotes are annotation elements. walls. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. For example. programming is not required. They help to describe or document the model. If you can draw. doors. dimensions.

Often. from geometry to construction data. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. By using a single project file. and drawings of the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. for example. Project: In Revit Architecture. schedules. top of wall. elevation views. and so forth). floors. for example. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. section views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. views of the project. and ceilings. To place levels. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. first floor. families. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction .In Revit Architecture. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. The project file contains all information for the building design. This information includes components used to design the model. Most often. such as roofs. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. and types. However. In other cases. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you can explicitly control them. or bottom of foundation. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. you must be in a section or elevation view.

The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. A type can also be a style. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. floors. For example. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. roofs. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. identical use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and levels. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). the user interface is labeled. categories of model elements include walls and beams. System families include walls. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. However. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. specifically its clear user interface. and similar graphical representation. In the steps that follow. ceilings.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. In the following illustration. System families can be transferred between projects. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. dimensions. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family.

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. By default. In addition. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. click (New). This creates a new project based on the default template. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.

the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. you type the required key combination to perform the command. which are listed on the menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Edit. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. While working in the drawing area. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. and View. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. For example.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. when you add a door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. For example. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 9 In the Type Selector. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. When you select the Door tool. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.11 Click OK. select Views (all). In the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. click the tab in the Design Bar.

and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and group name. The browser is dockable. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. families. elevations. delete. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. walls. 3D). and groups. windows). Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. family category (doors. and rename views. sheets.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. double-click its name. reports. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. schedules. To open a view.

In this case. Do not click. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Wall. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After creating a browser organization scheme. The cursor displays as a pencil." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 20 Press TAB. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. In addition. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. It highlights when the cursor is over it. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can use this tri-pane. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. in conjunction with tooltips. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). The status bar also provides information. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. click on the Standard toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise.18 On the Design Bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Click the Help button. click Modify to end the Wall command. press F1 for help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. Tooltips: To see tooltips. There are several tools that help you find information. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. regarding selected elements in a view. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Windows: From any window. When you place the cursor over an element. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. find a keyword on the Index tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. After you are familiar with these tasks. In the status bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. the view zooms out from the building model. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. 5 On the View toolbar. In the drawing area. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 7 Click in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the view zooms in on the selected area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. on the View toolbar. 10 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. . this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. As you move the mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button.

To define settings for SteeringWheels. and double-click 2nd Flr. For more information about SteeringWheels. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. referred to as shape handles. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. When drawing or modifying a building model. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. click Settings menu ➤ Options. display along the ends.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 15 To exit the wheel. and click Help. Cnst. and select the wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Small blue dots. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. called drag controls. 17 Type ZR. moving the wheel to the desired location. These are the drag controls. press ESC. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. as shown.

19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click (Move). moving the cursor to the left horizontally. for example. click to specify the starting position. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. The table moves down. Some commands. 23 Click next to the lower wall. After selecting the element to move. such as Move and Copy. as shown.18 Click and drag the left control. to lengthen the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Tools toolbar. In this case. you want to move the table closer to the wall. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. such as the Lines command. on the Standard toolbar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Move. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the plant. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Some commands. click Lines. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the Undo command. 26 On the Undo menu. and click again to end it. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the second item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this example. and drag it on top of the table.

30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice.29 To end the command. On the Design Bar. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

illustrating how building components work together. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In this tutorial. and annotate building assemblies. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. 27 . but for training purposes. Use detail components to define an assembly. When you have finished these tutorials. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. this tutorial uses imperial units only. In Revit Architecture.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. or referenced as a drafting view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. detail. Use keynotes to annotate a detail.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. you will create a drafting view. If necessary. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 2 In the Drafting View dialog.rvt. enter Window Head Detail. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. scroll until the folder is displayed. 3 In the Scale list. and reference a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. create a reference callout. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Drafting View. import a DWG detail. and click OK. click Training Files. for Name.

drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. select Black and White. The model zooms out. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.dwg.). 10 In the drawing area. The drawing area is still blank. as shown. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 6 In the Colors field list. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.In the Project Browser. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . 9 Type ZR. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. located directly to the left of the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. displaying the extents of the detail. click Training Files. and click Open.

The view displays to the specified area. and in the Scale list. 13 Click Reference other view. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list. 14 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click Callout.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. adjust the detail view display settings.The reference callout is created. and in the Scale list. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Callout. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. select Detail View: Detail. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. double-click the reference callout tag head. in the Type Selector.

Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Right-click Detail 0. double-click Wall Base 1.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Rename View dialog. enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. click Modify to clear the selection. for Name. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. under Detail Views(Detail).

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 Click OK. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click View Properties. 14 In the drawing area. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. select As Underlay. right-click. for Display Model.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown.

Model-Based Detailing | 35 . typical details can easily be placed. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. type 1' 6''. Directly above the drawing area.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .Brick on Mtl. If the crop region is enlarged. By grouping detail components. on the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 20 In the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. and press ENTER. Stud. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. 19 In the Type Selector. click Detail Components.

22 Press ESC twice to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. add the following detail components as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Create Instance. 23 Using the same method. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. click Modify to end the command.

select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

consistent means of identifying building assembly components. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. For more information about customizing a keynote database. c_express_workshop_details_start. click Training Files. Leader. special notes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and under Keynote Table. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. for Full Path. in the type selector. and Free End are selected. and format keynote styles. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. map keynotes by material. click Browse. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can customize this list. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. or instructions within a construction documentation package.txt. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.rvt. and verify that Horizontal.

Keynoting | 39 . place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm.5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. If no value has been specified. a question mark displays.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. Either move the text inside. 8 Click to place the tag. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.

16 In the drawing area. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 13 Click to place the tag. click Keynote ➤ Material.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 15 Select 07 21 00. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. and click OK.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .All items within the selection display in red.Boxed. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 19 In the Type Selector. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Click Check None. 17 On the Options Bar. legends. Only the keynotes remain selected. Click OK. Select Keynote Tags. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 20 Press ESC to clear the selection.

update the project information element properties. Place views on drawing sheets.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this lesson. In this exercise. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. Add labels to a title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. this tutorial uses imperial units only. and modify and update the project sheet title block. but for training purposes. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.

Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. or in the element properties of the title block. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. In the Project Browser. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In Revit Architecture. click Training Files. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . 3 Click OK.

Unnamed. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. To pan. double-click Checker. For Name. 6 In the Title Block. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. Click OK. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter Sections/Details. under Sheets(all). and click Rename. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Then. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.4 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. roll the wheel. right-click A602 . You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 5 In the drawing area. Smith and press ENTER. To zoom in and out. 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. hold down the wheel and drag. click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Enter K. In this tutorial.

Smith. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Project Name. The Family Editor opens. enter 4/10/2008. (Left) is selected. 15 In the Options Bar. 16 Type ZR. enter Design Development. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 18 On the Options Bar. enter J.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 13 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. select Text : 1/8''. select the title block. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Status. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. click Text. in the Type Selector. 20 Click and type Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area.

and verify that (Top) are selected. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and click. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. click Modify to exit the command. click (Load into Project). 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. select Label : 3/16''. under Category Parameters. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 22 Using the same method. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown.21 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Label. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method.

to a drawing sheet.Project. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .txt. select Override parameter values of existing types. representing the view or schedule. click Training Files. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. enter Keynote Legend . for Full Path. click Browse. a viewport displays. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. place and modify a keynote legend. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. and under Keynote Table. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. In this exercise. for Name. you will create. Next you will create. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Yes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog.

on the Appearance tab. and click OK. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Keynote Legend . 8 In the Project Browser.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. double-click A601 . under Sheets (all). expand Legends. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Text.Sections/Details. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. clear Show Headers.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.Project as shown. The keynote legend is visible. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.

Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. as shown. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. at the bottom of the Filter tab. select Filter by sheet.Sheet. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. not keynotes. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for View Name. and click OK. under Legends. expand Detail Views (Detail). enter Keynote Legend . and click OK. click Edit. 19 Click OK twice. 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and click Properties. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. The Keynote Legend is now blank.Project. right-click Keynote Legend . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.

and then add and update a Drawing list. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. double-click A0 . as shown.Title Sheet 1. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view title with line displays below the viewport. 2 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. The view remains selected. under Sheets (all).

5 In the Project Browser. You can specify text attributes for view titles. and zoom in on the drawing list. by default. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. Press ESC to clear the selection. expand Schedules/Quantities. define the information to include in a view title. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. The drawing list remains selected. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .When you place a view on a sheet. As part of a construction document set. 6 Type ZR. 3 In the Type Selector. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. or omit view titles from sheets.

clear Appears In Drawing List. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. under Sheets (all). and click Properties.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. select A602 . 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .Sections/Details and select A801 . including only sheets that contain views.Ceiling Plans. right-click the selected sheets. and click OK. while pressing SHIFT.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. For example. a central service core. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. 57 . You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. the wall or column will move with it. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you develop the building design. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. it is good practice to test the constraints. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. a curtain wall. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial.

you design inside the elevation markers. 3 Under Template file. West. South. East. and settings. but contains no geometry. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. and customize the project as necessary. Creating the Project In this exercise. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you use a template that is provided with the software. levels. click New. The new project opens. select Project. To create the project file. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. under Create new. In the drawing area in the right pane. and residential. verify that the second option is selected. and click Browse. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. 5 Click OK. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For this project.rte. In practice. under Projects. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. click Training Files. with an RVT extension. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you will use the default template. locate the Project Browser. The project is stored as a single file. you load any required family type that is not in your project. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. views. notice four elevation markers. from the product library. such as a door or window. In views that display elevation markers. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. construction.

such as schedules and legends. 8 Under Floor Plans. the view you see in the drawing area. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. view the Save reminder interval. 13 In the file window. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 7 If necessary. double-click Metric. As you design and document your building model. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. display in the south elevation. double-click South. and click Training Files. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. notice the Legends. reflected ceiling plan views. and delete them.rvt) is selected. Ceiling Plans. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. created by the template. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. You can add. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and other properties. 16 Click Save. and duplicate levels. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. then expand Floor Plans. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. duplicate them. delete. and elevation views created in the project by the template. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. heights. content and building model reports. verify that Project Files (*. Families. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE If you create a project without a template. Groups.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 14 For File name. These views are customizable: you can rename them. 10 In the Project Browser.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. schedules. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Two level lines. sheets. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating the Project | 59 . change their properties. and on the General tab. 15 For Save as type. and families in your project. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. as well as change their names. Sheets (all). enter Revit Retail Building. you will want to save your work frequently. expand Views (all). Schedules/Quantities.

and double-click South. You change the names of the 2 default levels. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. enter 00 Foundation. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. After you modify the two default levels. When you begin designing. doors. the other levels move and change with it. to each other. expand Views (all).17 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how the levels are locked. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. or constrained. and windows within the building model. Adding Project Levels on page 60. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). so that when one level moves. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and press ENTER.

As you move the cursor. and press ESC. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. Next. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. enter 0. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 5 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. and click OK. This is the Options Bar. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. enter -1800. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 . enter 01 Entry Level.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. which should display by default. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. not all the tabs are visible. 16 Enter 3750. If it does not. view the Design Bar. right-click. and press ENTER. and then move it up. When you add the new level. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. click Level. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and click Basics. 14 Click Plan View Types. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. By default. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and press ENTER.

enter 3750. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click Level 3.18 In the Project Browser. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. using a different option. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 19 Click OK. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. you add another level. 25 Click to place the level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. and move it slightly upward. and rename the corresponding views. Next. click Modify to end the command. click Rename. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Project Browser. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. or on the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 26 Press ESC. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click Level. If you create a level by copying it. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. and enter 02 Level.

Adding Project Levels | 63 . and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. as shown. and you can move them independently. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. all the levels move. the levels are no longer constrained. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. If you select a level and click its lock.

double-click 00 Foundation. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. When the grid is complete. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. select (Draw). On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. In a later exercise. click Modify. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. specify a start point for the grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. the column height changes as well. In the following exercise. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. so that if the roof elevation changes. click Grid. Move the cursor up. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area.

and click to place the line. and for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. click (Pick Lines). enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Next. and press ENTER. for Offset. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and click to place the line. Enter A. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. Click to place the grid line. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. for Offset. On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 .

66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. On the Options Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.8 Press ESC. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.

16 When you select the last vertical grid line. select grid lines C and 3. 22 While pressing CTRL. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click (Aligned). 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Press ESC twice.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 15 Starting with grid line A.

building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. click Modify. enter 6.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click . and select grid line A. and on the Options Bar. If necessary. click Duplicate. and select None. until it is closer to grid line 5. 33 On the Design Bar. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 50mm. (Element Properties). 26 In the drawing area. Two pins display on the grid lines. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern.5mm Bubble with Gap. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. until it is closer to grid line A. By pinning these central grid lines. 29 In the Name dialog. click the value for Center Segment. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 31 For End Segments Length. click Modify. 24 Press ESC. At the left endpoint of the grid line. and click OK. select grid line 5. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and press ESC. 32 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. The pins are hidden. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. and press ESC. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display.

click Structural Column.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. select Grid : 6. and on the Options Bar. click (Grid Intersection).5mm Bubble.5mm Bubble with Gap. and in the Type Selector. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 36 On the Design Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 37 Select the grid lines again. 35 In the Type Selector. select all of the grid lines. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . For Place By. click Finish. select Grid : 6. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Modify. and press ESC. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 39 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden.

and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. click Activate Dimensions. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Camera. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. select grid line A. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. select 01 Entry Level. 46 On the Options Bar. 47 Enter 9000. If it is unlocked. and unlock it. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. Next. double-click 01 Entry Level. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. for From. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 45 While pressing CTRL. and press ENTER. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. lock it. 43 Press ESC.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

and click Rename. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. The current view. named 3D View 1 by default. enter To Building. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. displays in bold under 3D Views. Adding Beams on page 72. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then copy them to subsequent levels. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. When you finish adding beams. In the Rename View dialog.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. and click OK.

10 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. Adding Beams | 73 . select each grid line. under 3D Views. The view is currently set to Coarse. click Finish. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 9 On the Options Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. click Beam. view the icons on the View Control Bar.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. the icon on the right side of the scale. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 8 While pressing CTRL. 4 Click Medium. 6 In the Type Selector. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid).

12 On the View toolbar.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. 13 On the Design Bar. press and hold SHIFT. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. right-click. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 14 Select one of the beams. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. select 02 Level. select 06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. and click OK. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. click Modify. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns.

resize the view to see the entire structure. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 20 Click Cancel. 22 On the Options Bar. and if necessary. for Top Level. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. (Element Properties). right-click. Adding Beams | 75 . under Constraints. under 3D Views. and click Element Properties. double-click To Building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. right-click. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof.to the 5th level. When you created the columns. 25 In the Project Browser. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. view the Top Level parameter. and click Select All Instances. select 06 Roof. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. click 24 Press ESC. All of the columns display as red. 21 With the column selected.

Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. under Elevations.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 28 Save the drawing. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click South. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. as lines only. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but you want to display them in less detail. press ESC to exit the command before continuing.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces on page 77. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces In this exercise. and press ESC to end the command. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces | 77 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. To better add the braces to the structure. you create 8 framing elevation views. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.

click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. press ESC twice. click to specify the start point of the brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 8 In the Type Selector. The associated framing elevation view displays. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After you add the final brace. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. and when the endpoint snap displays. 11 Using the same technique. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.

Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 18000 mm. and press ENTER. The height of the roof lowers.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. enter 10000 mm. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. double-click 00 Foundation.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 14 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. but this time add them from right to left. and press ENTER.

19 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 21 Select grid line A. NOTE As you add braces. as shown in the 3D view below. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Adding Braces | 81 . enter 12000 mm. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and press ENTER. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans.

Creating a Foundation on page 82. under 3D Views. beams. and drag it away from the structure. and if necessary. lock it. Test connectivity of the columns. double-click {3D}. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Save the drawing. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. grid size. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. under Floor Plans. under Elevations.24 In the Project Browser. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. click and roof height. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. double-click South. double-click 00 Foundation. 29 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.

under Floor Plans. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and press ESC twice. click Training Files. under Extents. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them.rfa. and click View Properties. and drag it to the drawing area. click Edit. After you load the pile cap family. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Click OK twice. 9 Close the warning dialog. and how to load specific families into a project. The pile cap has been added in the view. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. under View Depth. In the Element Properties dialog. In the View Range dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. The foundation pile cap now displays. for Level. and expand Structural Foundations.Before you can add the pile caps. Creating a Foundation | 83 . 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. double-click 00 Foundation. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. expand Families. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. A warning displays. select Unlimited. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser.

13 In the Project Browser. When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. press ESC twice. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

14 Close the file with or without saving it. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . right-click.rvt. double-click {3D}. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. under 3D Views. You load new column. you change the types of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beam. beams. click Training Files. and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and brace families into the project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. All columns in the building model display as red. 2 Select one of the columns.

under Dimensions. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203.9. click Duplicate. click Brace. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. The brace type changes. 9 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 75mm. 16 On the Design Bar. This not the size that you want to use. the braces as well as the beams change. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 6 In the Type Selector. In the following steps. right-click. 4 On the Design Bar.6X15. enter 75mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Elevation 1-a. select M_Round Bar : 25mm.2X101. click Edit/New. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type.3 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Modify. 17 While pressing CTRL. and click Select All Instances. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you change the brace type. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. and changing its size parameter. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. for d. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 10 On the Options Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click (Element Properties). but it is the only size of its type currently available. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).5CHS. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. for Type. click Modify.

Linking the Structural Model on page 87. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. After the files are linked. and click Open. select m_RRB_structure_complete. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.Origin to Origin. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. select Auto . click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.

4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. select Levels 00 through 06. depending on the project. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. In this case. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 6 In the drawing area. After the link is established. and walls could also be copy/monitored. and click Select Link. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. however. under Elevations. double-click South. select Multiple. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click Copy. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 In the drawing area. Grids. select the linked Revit model. click (Copy/Monitor). structural members.

Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. delete the Level 2 floor plan. 16 Click OK. click Finish mode. and click Delete. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 18 Using the same method.10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. while pressing SHIFT. right-click Level 1. click OK. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. for Floor Plan views. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . click Finish. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 13 On the Design Bar. First. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans.

25 In the View Templates dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click. click OK. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 21 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 In the New View Template dialog.19 In the Project Browser. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click OK. for Name. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select the Topography : Surface. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. right-click. 26 In the Project Browser.

32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Names. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays. click Camera. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. and click OK. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.

Some other Revit Architecture elements. stairs. In this exercise. and click Rename. 36 In the Rename View dialog.35 In the Project Browser. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. such as roofs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click OK. enter To Building. and railings are also created from sketches. click Training Files. Adding Floors on page 92. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. Adding Floors In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To create floors. right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.

and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click (Rectangle). On the Sketch tab. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. select the top floor line. Leave this dimension unlocked. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. click Lines. Move the cursor to the left. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not lock the dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and elements in the current view display as gray. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. click Floor. under Floor Plans. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. On the Options Bar. past the first vertical grid line. Adding Floors | 93 . You are now in the Sketch Editor.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. If the grid changes size. double-click 01 Entry Level.

At the top left corner of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. and change their values to 300 mm. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. click Modify. press ENTER. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. select the top floor line. and click the temporary dimension value. Enter 300.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then press ESC. They display on the floor sketch. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 7 On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Move the cursor to the left dimension.

click Quit Sketch. enter 1500mm. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. and press ESC. click Lines. On the Options Bar. Select the three remaining floor lines.8 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. and for Offset. using a different sketching technique. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor. click Edit. and lock the dimensions. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click (Pick Lines). The 02 Level floor sketch displays. Adding Floors | 95 . on the Design Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. Next. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.

14 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Lines. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 17 On the Sketch tab. click (Rectangle). click (Align). double-click 03 Level. 18 On the Options Bar. and a lock icon displays. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. under Floor Plans. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays.

30 In the Select Levels dialog. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.24 On the Design Bar. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. and lock the edges. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. select 05 Roof Garden. Alternatively. under Views ➤ 3D Views. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. click Finish Sketch. 32 Select the floor. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 97 . double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click 06 Roof. and press ENTER.rvt. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To create the roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. Click (Pick Lines). click to place the roof line. under Floor Plans. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ For Offset. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. click Training Files. When a blue dashed line displays. enter 1800 mm. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click Lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). for Offset. and when the blue dashed line displays. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 99 .6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar.

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). ■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area.

19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. click Section. and press ENTER. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. 15 On the Options Bar. on grid D. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.14 On the Options Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). and click to specify the section. enter -100 mm. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . for Elevation.

22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. click Edit/New. double-click 06 Roof. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. select the roof. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. under Floor Plans. for Structure. click Edit. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Modify. (Element Properties). 30 Click OK 3 times. under Construction.20 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Variable. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Structure [1]. In section. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view.

Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. zoom in to the roof. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. click (Default 3D View). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and press DELETE. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 37 If necessary. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 103 . on the View Control Bar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the section line. select each edge. click Modify. In this case. 40 In the Type Selector. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 41 Starting with the left front edge.31 On the Design Bar. 38 In the 3D view. 33 In the warning dialog. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. select Fascia : Fascia . moving counter-clockwise.Roof Edge.

Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. under 3D Views. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add a curtain wall. click Modify. so if you resize the grid. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. the curtain wall resizes with it. double-click To Building.42 On the Design Bar. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Spacing. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click 01 Entry Level. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. enter 2100 mm.rvt. and move it slightly toward the building interior. for Type. for Join Condition. enter 1050 mm. For Height. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. When you duplicate a type. click to place the first curtain wall segment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Construction. select 01 Entry Level. click Wall. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Click OK twice. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 3 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select 05 Roof Garden. for Spacing. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. The type is saved in the project. enter Retail Storefront. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. For Offset. For Level. 6 In the Name dialog. enter 600 mm. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser.

dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you can delete the dimensions. and trim each curtain wall segment. click Dimension. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. so they remain in the view. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. These dimensions are not in a sketch. double-click To Building. 15 On the View Control Bar.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. If the grid moves. and lock the dimensions. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). If you want to hide them. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 7 Click OK. To better work with the curtain wall panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 2 On the View Control Bar. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. and click None.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. All the elements in the list are selected. and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 5 Under Visibility. under the element list. click All. clear one element to clear all the elements. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. Do not select Columns. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Under Visibility.

and click OK. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 16 On the View Control Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 10 Select 1 panel. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 12 With the panels selected. double-click {3D}. click Modify. select System Panel : Solid. 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. in the Type Selector.9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. under 3D Views. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. press and hold CTRL. in this case an architectural elevation. 18 On the View Control Bar. select Architectural Elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click South. 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. select One Segment. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and click to select it. 30 On the Design Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select another mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. and unpin it. 27 On the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously.

select it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. and unpin it. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and view the new entrance. press TAB until it is selected. 34 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View).

Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. open the North elevation. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd.38 Press DELETE. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 40 Optionally. 39 Using the same process.

for Underlay. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Click OK. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Graphics. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click in the view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click OK. select the grip closest to the callout head. enter Display Area. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. and click to complete the callout.

as shown. and click Flip Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. right-click. click Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 12 Draw a section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 Select the section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.

For Loc Line. under Floor Plans. enter Section Display Area. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Press ESC twice. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). expand Sections (Building Section). 27 On the Options Bar. Click (Rectangle). for Prefer. right-click Section 1. double-click 01 Entry Level. Lock both alignments.135mm Partition (2-hr). 21 In the Type Selector. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. select Wall faces. click (Align). select Basic Wall : Interior . ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor.17 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click Rename. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . select Finish Face: Exterior. click Dimension. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.

37 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Section). Notice that the walls extend to the floor.) 36 Press ESC twice. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. click Ceiling. and lock the dimension. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Next. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. double-click Section Display Area. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 38 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Ceiling Plans. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid.

On the Options Bar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . enter 2700 mm. and press ESC. for Top/Base. double-click 01 Entry Level. 43 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. for Height Offset From Level. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. under Ceiling Plans. click to select it. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click OK. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 46 Press ESC. and click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. for Base Offset. click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. and click OK. 47 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Select the 02 Level Floor. enter 2700 mm. under Constraints. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. under Sections. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling.

58 On the Edit toolbar. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Ceiling Plans. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Type. and click . 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Cancel. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. 54 Click OK. view the ceiling structure.49 In the Project Browser. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. for Structure. click Cancel. click Edit. click (Rotate). 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows On.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 64 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. 66 Optionally.

Move the cursor over grid line B. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. enter 1500 mm. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and copy it to the 05 Level. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.rvt.

5 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and 3. 7 Using the same method. shorten the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Modify. 6 Select the left reference plane. click Stairs. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 2. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C.

Move the cursor down. 10 On the Options Bar. including its handrails. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. select Finish Face: Interior. Click (Rectangle). and select the 2nd reference plane. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Basic Wall : Generic . beyond the end of the stair. click Wall. The complete stair displays. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.225mm Masonry. and specify a point. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.

and specify a point away from the wall. and press ENTER. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the wall. and click to select it. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. enter 1200 mm. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Wall faces. click Dimension. Click Modify.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. Lock the dimension. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. for Prefer. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 18 Using the same technique. Select the interior face of the wall. select the dimension value. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and lock the alignment.

and press DELETE. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door.21 Select the dimension. 24 On the Standard toolbar. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 28 On the Options Bar. TIP To flip the door swing. click Door. select both reference planes. 23 Select the stair. (Undo). a warning displays. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Because the dimension is constrained. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. The stair and walls move to the left. clear Tag on Placement. and press DELETE. 27 In the Type Selector. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 25 While pressing CTRL. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.

for Multistory Top Level. select 00 Foundation. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 33 Select the stair. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click Modify. but if you view the top level of the building. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 35 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. and move the cursor to spin the building model. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Default 3D View). For Top Constraint. Click OK. select all 4 walls. click Align. click 36 On the View toolbar. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Under Constraints.30 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. for Base Constraint. (Element Properties). click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. (SteeringWheels). double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. (Rectangle). select 05 Roof Garden. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . on the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click (Default 3D View). click see the roof. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK. and lock the alignment. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and lock the alignments. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. (SteeringWheels). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.

click 59 On the View toolbar. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). for Base Offset. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). For Top Constraint. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. Under Constraints. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 56 Select the shaft. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.55 In the Project Browser. enter 300 mm. (Default 3D View). By offsetting the base. under Floor Plans.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. and click View Properties. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. select 06 Roof. click Training Files.

You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. and click (Fillet arc). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 16 On the Design Bar.225mm Masonry. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click Remove Constraints. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and press ENTER. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. select Elevation: South. click Edit Profile. and then select the right face of the wall. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value.5 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. enter 9750. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. and click Open View. 15 In the error dialog. The exact placement is not important. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click . click (Align). 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click Finish Sketch. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click . as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle). 22 In the Project Browser. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.18 In the upper right corner of the profile.

134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Training Files. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component.5 Meters. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Basics tab. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. select M_RPC Tree . as shown. and press ESC twice. double-click 05 Roof Garden. TIP After you place the 1st planter.rvt.4. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. between grid lines C and D. 6 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 3 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Name dialog. double-click {3D}. (Element Properties). View the roof. and in the Type Selector. click Edit/New. as shown. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 1500 mm. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and then click OK twice. 18 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 17 While pressing CTRL. enter 2400 mm. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Tree .5 Meters. for Type. click Lines. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Height. click Floor. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. select the 2 remaining trees. under 3D Views.5 Meters.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. click (Default 3D View).8 On the View toolbar. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 16 Click Apply. 11 Select one of the trees. For Offset. 21 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.

23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 26 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). for Offset. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 25 Using the same method. enter 0 mm. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 29 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. and click to sketch a line.

and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 35 Select the line that you just drew. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and click to finish the line. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 32 Press ESC.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

and on the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. The completed sidewalk displays. near Column E5. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. enter -250 mm. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. When you render an image. In plan view. 39 Select the sidewalk. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 42 In the Name dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. a photorealistic image displays. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. for Height Offset from Level. 48 In the Type Selector. and click so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 45 Click OK.38 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 43 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the Options Bar. Next. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). click Edit/New. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click Component. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . for Type. under Constraints. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight.

140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the car. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 52 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Camera. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 56 Press ESC twice. about 30 degrees. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click (Element Properties). select M_RPC Beetle. 54 In the Type Selector.NOTE If necessary. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown.

under 3D Views. 63 Click the sidewalk. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. click Pick Host. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 66 Using the same method.59 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. enter -300 mm. If the sidewalk changes height. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and on the Options Bar. 60 In the Project Browser. and click OK. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 65 Click the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. When you select a host for a component. click Pick Host. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. Next. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . double-click To Building. 64 Select Alex. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. under Elevations. under Constraints. double-click West. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.

68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.

2 Zoom in to the stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 5 On the View toolbar. walls. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. you delete the entire stairwell.rvt. click 6 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. 4 Press DELETE.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and shaft opening. click (Default 3D View). By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels). click Training Files. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. 13 In the drawing area. click (Align). right-click m_RRB_core. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the linked instance. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. and notice that the linked file is listed. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click Training Files. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. expand Model. and on the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation.

and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. and on the Options Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. and click to align the center. ■ ■ Click grid line C. (Default 3D View). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click Ungroup. 17 On the Design Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Modify. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. click 21 On the View toolbar. click (top down view). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (SteeringWheels). 20 On the View toolbar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. click Training Files. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. where it is hosted within a railing family. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After you modify it. you add glass railings around the floor edges. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.

rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. click OK. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and Parapet. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Split). expand Renderings. 8 In the Project Browser. The rendering displays. 13 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 02 Level. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and select Glass. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 5 Expand Railing. 3 In the Conference project. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Conference. expand Families. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and expand Railings.rvt. and on the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. The floor sketch displays. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. press and hold CTRL. in the Project Browser. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. under Floor Plans. Handrail only. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and click to split the floor.

and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click to draw another line. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click (Align). 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select grid line B. 18 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.15 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. click Modify. verify that Chain is not selected. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew.

34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the lock to lock the alignment. Lock the dimensions. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. enter 100 mm. select Glass.rvt project. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. and click OK. click Railing. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. For Offset. 29 On the Design Bar.26 Select grid line D. and lock the alignment. click Dimension. click Finish Sketch. for Type. 30 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. exterior fire stairs. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. lofty ceilings. slight modifications to the building design have been made. balconies. 153 . and a roof garden. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. NOTE For training purposes. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials.

154 .

You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. how to create section and elevation views. section. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. including plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. 155 . elevation. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.

3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. select Level 2. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 .2 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

11 Under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. Next. enter Vicinity Plan. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. click the current scale.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 .rvt.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt. click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 8 On the Design Bar.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. click Modify.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). under Elevations. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. for Scale. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. ■ Move the cursor down. 14 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. enter South East. select 1:100. and click OK.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. using the blue circular drag grip. 24 Select gridline F. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 .

25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To create each view.

Creating Callout Views | 167 . for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Resulting callout view . 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select 1:50. click Callout. select Floor Plan. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.rvt. double-click Level 1.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to specify a point to complete the callout.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. ■ Select the middle grip.

and click OK. for Scale. 13 In the Type Selector. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. select 1:50. Creating Callout Views | 169 . click Modify. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. under Sections (Building Sections). 9 In the Rename View dialog.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog.17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details). and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

rvt. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . open Metric\Families\Annotations. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. You change the appearance of the section mark head. double-click Level 1. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select Custom-Section Head.rfa. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and click Open. the elevation markers.

click the Annotation Objects tab. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 17 Under Category. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and can be applied to the section line.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 15 Under Category. click Duplicate. Section Tail . select Section Head . and click OK twice. 10 On the floor plan. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 2. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 4 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan. Section Tail – Filled. click Load into Project. clear any others. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.5mm Square. 19 Click OK.Custom. scroll to Section Marks. and click OK. for Section Head. select the section line. and click OK. click Edit/New. select the current project.Filled. and select 3. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 12 For Section Tag. scroll to Section Line. 22 In the Name dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 8 In the Name dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter Section Head – Custom. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . enter 12. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.

5 mm.23 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. select the current project. . under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. and click OK. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 12. . and click OK. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Square. and on the Options Bar. enter 6 mm. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. For Corner Radius. select the callout. click Edit/New. clear all others. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.5mm Square. for Elevation Tag. select 3. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. On the floor plan. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. for Callout Tag. click Load into Project. and click Open. 34 In the Name dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Press ESC. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. For Dimensions ➤ Width. notice the square elevation markers that display. Click OK. 39 Click OK twice. 27 Click OK twice. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 12. click Training Files. For Line Weight. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Edit/New. select Custom-Callout Head. 36 In the drawing.

and select 4. filters.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. You learn to create view templates. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. masking regions. 49 Click OK. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. expand Callout Boundary. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Dash. and select 7. 43 Under Category. and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . view regions. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

5 On the View Control Bar. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To accomplish this. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Training Files.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Show Crop Region). 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and double-click East. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. click Zoom to Fit. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. The crop region displays as red. under Elevations.

9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 On the View Control bar. Callouts. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a View Template | 177 . 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. levels. grids. under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 11 Under Visibility. elevation markers. clear Entourage.

21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. click OK. edit the crop region as before. right-click North. click Apply. and click OK. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. right-click East.14 In the Project Browser. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.rvt. and click Apply View Template. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 Using the same method. under Elevations. 16 In the View Templates dialog. double-click North. under Elevations. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New View Template dialog. and click Create View Template From View.

NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. right-click. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . for View Range. select Penthouse.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Level. Under View Depth.rvt. and click Properties. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. under Extents. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans. double-click Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit. for Bottom. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.

right-click. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Bottom. select Level 4.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for View Range. select Level 4. Click OK twice. under Extents. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. double-click Roof Plan.

16 On the Design Bar. for View Range. for Bottom. Move you cursor diagonally. under Extents. Click OK twice. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 11 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Under View Depth. 10 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. click Plan Region. click Edit. In the left corner of the building. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 13 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . After you apply the filter. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.17 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. in this case. click the Filters tab. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. the fire rating of the walls.

click Override under Patterns. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. select Walls. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . click Edit/New. under Categories. 16 Click OK. click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. enter Rated Walls. select the red color. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. Enter Hr. click <No Override>. 10 On the Filter tab. click (New). On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Add. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. under Filters. for Color. and click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK. 7 In the Filters dialog. select Solid Fill. select Fire Rating. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. click Remove. for Pattern. and apply a color. 12 On the Filter tab. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. Select contains. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. for Rated Walls. under Basic colors. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. under Floor Plans. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. as shown. select Invisible lines. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 Select the crop region.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.

8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. click the current scale. under Floor Plans. and click OK.Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 11 Click OK twice. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Walls. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click 1: 50. and click Rename. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Solid fill. right-click. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Patterns field. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Override. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click OK. 7 Under Cut. under Pattern Overrides. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . click black. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Unit 18 Plan . right-click.rvt. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. clear Grids. click Modify.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click OK. 21 Under Projection/Surface. select the sofa. select Dash. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 23 In the Color dialog.20 Right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection. click <No Override> to apply a color. 25 Click OK twice. click Projection Lines. right-click. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click Override. click a purple color. under Lines. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog.

The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click .28 For Color. click By Category Override. click Modify. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 32 Select one of the lamps. 29 In the Color dialog. select a bright green color. and click OK twice. right-click.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.33 On the View Control Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click .

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click View. click Sheet.Creating Sheets. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select A0 metric. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

For Sheet Name. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Number. expand Sheets (all). 7 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. and select the title block. enter Site Plan. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. enter A101. Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 3 In the Project Browser.

13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter 2009-1. under Other. For Project Status. enter For Approval. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 .Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 15 May. The new project information displays in the titleblock. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 2009. For Project Number. Smith. For Project Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. click Edit. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter Freighthouse Flats. 14 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. for Project Address. enter J. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Client Name.

Layout Plan A104 . enter Floor Plan. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations A107 . select the new sheet name. 17 In the Project Browser. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt.Elevations A105 . and click OK. and click OK.Elevations A106 . you add views to these sheets. for Name. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Rename. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Save.Sections A108 . right-click. select A0 metric.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

2 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. double-click A102 . Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view. double-click A104 . click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans.rvt.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Elevations. and drag it to the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays.Floor Plan.

double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it.Sections. 12 On the Design Bar.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. move the cursor over it. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. zoom in to the grip. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . select 1:5.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. for View Scale.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Stairs. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all).Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and click to place it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click A108 . under Floor Plans. click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click Level 1. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 Under Floor Plans.

Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. enter 16700 mm.Sections. double-click A107 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 2 Select the building section view. and press ENTER. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. and click Activate View. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all).Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

you create a title sheet for your drawing set.rvt. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. After you create the sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. double-click North. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Right-click. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You modify the view to hide the view title. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 3 In the Project Browser.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The camera view displays. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . click Camera. enter T. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric. and click Properties. right-click. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click Level 1. Click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Under Camera. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 13 In the Project Browser. For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. Click OK. under Sheets (all). click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 12 On the View Control Bar.Title Sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. enter 100000 mm. enter 18000 mm. Under Extents. double-click T . 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. for Eye Elevation.

enter Viewport/no title mark. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. Click Apply. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. select No. click Edit/New. on the Options Bar. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 24 Click OK twice. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 635 mm. click Duplicate. Under Model Crop Size. under Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). 19 Select the view on the sheet. .15 With the view selected. and click OK. for Show title. and then click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Size. for Height. click Modify. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 25 On the Design Bar.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Tagging Objects In this lesson. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as doors and windows. Because of the open style floor plan. such as room and window schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial.Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. expand Floor Plans. 207 . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files.

right-click in the Design Bar. click Room Separation. and click Room and Area. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Load.6 Using the same method. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 9 In the Tags dialog.

click OK. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click it. click Room. and press ENTER. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited. The room tag number displays in blue. and select the room tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and click to place the room and tag. type 2400 mm. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 14 For Offset. verify that Tag on placement is selected.

type Kitchen. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 23 Using the same method. click Room. place rooms and tags. Dining. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 19 On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . click Modify. type Entry. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). and moving clockwise. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged. click Room Tag. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 29 On the Design Bar.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Level 2. expand Lines. clear Room Separation. click Modify. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.

click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . clear Leader. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . you learn how to place door and window tags.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the Project Browser. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

11 Using the same method. type Building Entry. The room Number is U17-46. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. select Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 105. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . and press ENTER. type Corridor. for room 101. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. select Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. For 104.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. click New. type Storage. for Name. next to Rows. For 102. and press ENTER.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Weight. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . place rooms from a program list. and click OK. and modify room names. 4 Click OK twice. 13 Save the file. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you add room separation lines. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Lines field. In the Line Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. For Room Separation. under Projection/Surface.rvt. click the bright green swatch. click Override.■ For 106. In the Lines field. and press ENTER. Under Custom colors. under Visibility. click the Color field. expand Lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. select 9. type Stair.

6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Room. draw the horizontal line. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Modify. First. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing.

for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset. 11 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. type 2400 mm. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Level 1. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Room Schedule. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 20 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 19 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. 16 Using the same method.

(Element Properties). click 23 On the Design Bar. select Base Finish. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. 30 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Rows. and for all 3 finishes. and click OK. clear Room Bounding. under Category. type Units. under Available fields. and click Add. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .21 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. click Modify. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click New. click Schedule/Quantities. Floor Finish. 31 For Key Name. and Wall Finish. type As Selected.

select Rooms. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click OK. under Floor Plans. for Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Room Schedule. and click Add. 44 On the Options Bar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Units. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Room Style. for Available fields. 43 In the Filter dialog. click (Element Properties). 38 Under U17-8. click Edit. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. select Units. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. and click OK. under Other. double-click Level 1. 42 On the Options Bar. and click Properties.32 Using the same method. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 33 In the Project Browser. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 Click OK twice. select Room Style.

Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 48 Save the file. and double-click Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. click OK.rvt. and 106. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). For rooms 102 and 105. select Public. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. select Service. 9 In the Project Browser. select Room Style. for Name. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Floor Plans. under Graphics. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. click 5 For Title. for Color. right-click Level 1. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. (Duplicate). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. type Room Type. click OK. type Room Type. and click Properties.46 Open the Room Schedule. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. at the warning prompt. and click OK. click the Color Scheme field. 103. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. under Views (all).

click Edit. click the value in the Color column. and click OK. clear Visible. under Schemes.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. and clear Room Separation. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 14 Click OK twice. click Modify. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. select Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . click Color Scheme Legend. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Visibility. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Lines. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.

29 Click OK twice. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. (Element Properties). change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. select blue. for Swatch Width. on the Options Bar. under Custom color. for Size.22 In the Color dialog. 23 Using the same method. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 5 mm. and click OK. type 25 mm. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. respectively. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Under Title Text. 24 Click OK.

the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. select Room Type. double-click Building Section. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. and click OK. and select Properties. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Visibility. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Edit. under Graphics. click Color Scheme Legend. 35 Click OK twice. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Color Scheme. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Rooms. right-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Sections. under Sections. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance.

45 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style. for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. (Filter Selection). 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. click Check None. 46 Click . select all the rooms in the stairwell. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). select Public. and click OK. click . select Units. under Identity Data.

for Rows. for Room Style. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . under Key Name for the new row. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Style Schedule. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. click New. and click . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. excluding the stairwell spaces.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select Service. under Identity Data. 54 While pressing CTRL. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 On the Options Bar. and click OK. type Suites.

55 Click . and click OK. The color fill extends to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Areas and Volumes. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. and click OK. select Suites. under Volume Computations. 59 Under Room Area Computation. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. for Room Style. The color fill will extend to the roof. under Identity Data. select the room on the left side of the top floor. but not beyond it. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select the stairwell room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). click Modify. type 0. 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click . for Upper Limit. and click 65 For Limit Offset. under Constraints. the dining room. 66 Click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. 70 For Limit Offset.0. and the living room. 71 Click OK. 67 On the first level. select Level 2. select Loft. type -254 mm. .

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file.rvt. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.

Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 9 Using the same method.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Roofs.EPDM. click Modify. select Family and Type. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 5 On the Design Bar. For Then by. 4 In the Type Selector. Clear Itemize every instance. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. under Category. click Family and Type.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Material: Description. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and click OK. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. under Available fields. Select Grand totals. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

under Available fields. 12 Click OK. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 21 Click OK. Under Field formatting. select Material: Cost. 19 For Type. 17 Click Calculated Value. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and under Fields. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Currency. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. for Fields. select Calculate totals. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Material: Cost. select Material: Area. 20 For Formula. for Name. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Properties.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. and click OK twice. 23 For Field formatting. click Estimated Cost.40 50. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit. click the Formatting tab. under Other. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13.

You draw a travel path line. regardless of category. 26 In the Project Units dialog. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. either within family components or within the project template. for Currency. 29 Select Use digit grouping. for Rounding. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. In this lesson.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. and are defined and stored in an external file. 27 In the Format dialog. can be used for any number-based parameter. 30 Click OK twice. select $. The cost fields are formatted correctly. click the Format value.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. which inserts commas after every three digits. and reporting the shared parameters. adding the shared parameters to a family. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. creating a generic tag to tag the family. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. tag the line. 28 For Unit symbol. you create a shared parameter file. you create an exiting plan for the building. 31 Save the file. Digit grouping. not just for currency. ensuring consistency across families and projects.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. select Length. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.txt. type Travel Distance. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 11 Click OK twice. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Name. for Name. click Training Files. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for File name. and click OK. and click Save. click Create. click Training Files. under Groups.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. type Exiting.rvt. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 7 Under Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 9 Under Parameters. click New. click New. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. type Path ID. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Type of Parameter. under Floor Plans.rvt.

type Length. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Constraints. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. for Travel Distance Formula. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and select Instance. and click OK. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Family Types. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. Click Training Files. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 11 Click OK.rvt.rvt. under Parameters. in the Load into Projects dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 8 Select Instance. If you have multiple projects open. and click OK. under Parameter Data. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. following the equals symbol (=). for Group parameter under. 4 In the Family Types dialog. select Shared parameter. under Parameter Type. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Load into Projects. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. click Add. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. group it under Dimensions.rfa. 3 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 13 Click Apply. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . and click Select. 10 Using the same method. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. otherwise the family loads into the current project. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 15 If necessary.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add.

27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click parameter(s) to label). under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance. 24 Click OK twice. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. select Travel Distance. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and click OK. click Label. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files.rft. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Select. click Label.

type M_Travel Distance Tag. click Load into Projects.rvt is selected. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.rfa. and move it down. 32 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window. 33 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and press DELETE. and click Save. click Modify. for File Name. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 35 Save the file. select Path ID. and click OK. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.

rvt. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Level 1. and click in the center of the corridor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. above the exterior door as shown. After the lines are tagged. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Tagging.Placing. select Chain. double-click Exiting Plan . 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. click Component. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. under Floor Plans.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . double click Exiting Plan . select the 2 dashed travel lines. move the cursor near the right corner. 10 On the Options Bar. Placing. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. through the door. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Level 2. under Constraints. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click outside of the building. for Path ID. clear Leader. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. type 1-1. click Component. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). 12 On the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK.7 Move the cursor down.

click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down. and click. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the left.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar.

Placing. and click OK. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. 30 Using the same method. under Category. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. for Path ID. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type 2-1. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. . verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints.Tagging.

type 2-. in the first field. select Travel Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. in the second field. and click Add. in the third field. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 43 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. and in the third field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select Path ID. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson.rvt. 50 Save the file. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. click Edit. select contains. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. type 1-. and click Rename. 44 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields. click Training Files. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID. 38 For Sort by. for Filter by. 49 Click OK twice. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. type Level 2 Exit Distance. for Filter. under Other.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and under Field formatting. 42 Click OK. and click OK. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 41 Under Fields.

2 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab.Interiors ➤ C10 .Partitions . and select C1010145 . and click View. 4 Under Available fields. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click Properties. under Categories. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . right-click the Design Bar. and click .Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Walls. expand C . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code. 9 Click OK twice.152 mm. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select the following fields. under Identity Data. click the Value field.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .Fixed Partitions. right-click Generic .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 10 In the schedule.

mdb. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 6 Click Finish. click Create. type Revit_Project. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and click OK to create the database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.rvt. click Training Files. 1 On the File menu. select a location for the database file. for Database Name. the database display may be different than that shown. and click Next.mdb). click OK.11 Close the exercise file. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. under Database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the New Database dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 3 Click New. 9 Under Directories. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click the File Data Source tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.

Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Additionally. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports.

262 .

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. 263 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. In order to detail from the building model. add detail components. plywood. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. These components display at the required scale. 297 . you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. In the callout view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.

You load detail components. click Training Files. you detail the view of the roof edge. After you add components. and insulation objects.rfa. click Training Files. click Detail Component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select As underlay. which means that all detail components. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component.Detailing the View In this exercise. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. and click Open. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 5 In the alert dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click the detail callout head. They are also view specific. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. as well as detail lines. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. region objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The roof overhang detail displays. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 7 In the drawing area.

select Corrugated Metal. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 406. Detailing the View | 299 . click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 19 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. 16 Click OK twice.8 Delete the component. click Modify. 15 For Spacing. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click (Element Properties). You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.5mm. click Edit/New. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. 17 In the drawing area.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. click (Move). click Training Files. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Load.

and place it in the detail view as shown. 31 To properly orient the component. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 30 In the Type Selector.rvt.Because you still have several components to load. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 301 . press SPACEBAR 3 times. click OK. and click Open. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 33 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. select Chain. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. click the Flip instance arrows. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. enter 140mm. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. ■ Click Modify. For Offset. Detailing the View | 303 . 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. select to near side. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. as shown. click Detail Component. click Insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. and on the Edit toolbar. 42 Click Modify. click (Move).Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar.

and lock the component. as shown. they are view specific.rvt. 47 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 51 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Thin Lines. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing .45 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the Type Selector. meaning they display only in this view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector.

and press ENTER. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.4 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. For Offset. enter 10mm. enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). as shown.

enter 10mm. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. click Detail Lines. and click OK. right-click. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). draw the detail lines as shown. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. 26 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.18 In the Type Selector. select Do not display. When you turn the display model off. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Thin Lines. and press ENTER. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. select the Penthouse level line. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Vapor Barrier. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment.

33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 32 Click Modify. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes on page 308.

click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 2 On the Options Bar. click Text. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Enter the text. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.rvt. 6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension.

under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).Keynotes. select a text note. enter Typ. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click OK.rvt. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. right-click. and click the dimension text. right-click. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. (Filter Selection). Creating Detail Components on page 310. click 6 In the Filter dialog.. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Suffix. under Text Fields. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.7 Select the dimension line. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click. on the Options Bar. and save the exercise file. click Select All Instances. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser.

rft. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 14 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and selecting the chain. and click Open. select all the coping linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 16 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.7 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Training Files. while pressing CTRL. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector. pressing TAB. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.

and click Save. click Load. 28 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Modify. delete the underlying linework. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Keynotes In this exercise. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Load into Projects. click Detail Component. and click Open. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Adding Keynotes on page 312. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. select the coping. for File name.18 In the Save As dialog. click Detail Component.Keynotes view is not the open view. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rfa. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The original linework remains selected. 23 Using a window. navigate to your preferred location. 21 To place the component. clear Detail Items. 30 In the drawing area. While pressing SHIFT. 26 Press DELETE. enter Roof Edge. you place keynotes on objects. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click . 25 In the Filter dialog. and the component can be placed in the detail. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

(Element Properties). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.rfa. 2 In the alert dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.rvt. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 19mm Plywood. Adding Keynotes | 313 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. and click OK. and click Open. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 6 Click Modify.C1. Click to place the leader arm.B5. select the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 07645. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. use keynote 06160. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. In the Keynotes dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For the metal coping.D11. click Training Files. click Keynote ➤ Element. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Roof Edge4.

click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click .A8.G1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.F1. use keynote 06160. You do this in order to keynote the component. FasciaProfile_1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06110. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 18 Save the file. For the 50 x 150. 22mm Corrugated Steel . For the 50 x 200. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times.F1. click in the Value column. select Corrugated Metal. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 300. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.20 Ga.I1. 17 Keynote the component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.9 In the Type Properties dialog.D11. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 06110. use keynote 09250.D1. using keynote 07460. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.

8 In the Save As dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.rvt. 24 While pressing CTRL. 15 Click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Training Files. and select the right end point. and click Save. click Detail Component.rft. 4 In the Type Selector. 16 Select the component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to your preferred location. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Medium Line Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. 6 Lock the line. 5 In the drawing area. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. and click (Element Properties). select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for File name. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Training Files. and click Open. 11 Press DELETE. 22 On the Options Bar. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Load into Projects. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select Medium Lines. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Lines. 19 In the Name dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . and click Modify. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area.

and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 29 In the drawing area. 38 On the Design Bar. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Edit/New. on the Edit toolbar. 40 Click Modify. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Detail Component. invisible. 28 In the Type Selector. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.G1. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 42 Using the same method used previously. select m_Light Line Detail Component.A5. against the 19mm plywood. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 Select the component just added. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 48 Using the same method used previously. click Duplicate. and click . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and click the lower end at the break line. 47 Select the component. 34 In the Name dialog. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 49 With the component selected. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click in the Value column. 44 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. name the component Air Barrier. 27 On the Design Bar. click (Move). 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 06110. 36 In the Keynotes dialog.25 Next. and assign it keynote 07260. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 Move the air barrier to the right.A1. and click . and hidden) used in the view. 46 Click Modify. and click . 30 Click Modify. enter EPDM Membrane. 31 Select the component.

55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. and click . 52 In the Type Selector.

65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . in the Type Selector.A4. select the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. select Invisible Lines. name the component Vapor Barrier. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. and Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 60 On the Design Bar.rfa. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. Air Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260. 61 In the drawing area. 50 x 200 Framing. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 68 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component.

70 Using the method used previously. click File menu ➤ Save. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press ENTER. Enter 07460. click Browse. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and assign it keynote 07210.A4. Enter 07463. under Keynote Table. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. add a keynote for the component.A9. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and click .A1. 71 In the drawing area. and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 3 In the text editor. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.txt. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. name the component Batt Insul. and close the text editor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.69 Select the component.rvt. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. The database file opens in a text editor. 72 Save the file. and press TAB.

select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). These details do not update with changes to the building model. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. under Path Type. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 9 In the drawing area. select all the keynotes. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. After you create a drafting view. click Keynote ➤ Element. click to place the leader. and click OK. and click Open. navigate to 07463. 14 Save the file. 11 Click Modify. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. select Absolute. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. you learn how to create a drafted detail. In the Type Selector. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click OK.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.txt. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. and click to place the note. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 13 Click Modify.

rvt. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. right-click Drafting 1. verify that Auto . 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select 1 : 5.rvt.Center to Center is selected. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. For Positioning. Click Open. The detail is imported as an import symbol. For Colors. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Black and White. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click OK. and click Rename.dwg. 7 In the Rename View dialog. for Scale. 6 In the Project Browser. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .

3 On the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 5 Click Modify. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 10 In the Rename dialog. enter Detail . click Rename. 12 Click OK twice. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 6 Select the callout. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label.No Reference. and click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. select Reference other view. delete the existing value. click Edit/New. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. for New.

Elev.No Reference). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout./Det. double-click A105 . The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . The callout is updated with the sheet information. 18 Save the file. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. click Modify. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .

5 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Region Properties.rvt. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Detail Component. 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. enter Gyp. and click OK. 11 In the Name dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 14 Click OK 3 times. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Board. for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Filled Region.

select the width dimension. and enter 20. click . 18 While pressing CTRL. click 22 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . (Mirror). click Finish Sketch. 19 In the Type Selector.5mm. click (Draw). 16 Select the left edge of the region. 20 On the Design Bar. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. and on the Edit toolbar. select Wide Lines.

for Name. click Duplicate. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. click Region Properties. . enter Wood . Move the cursor up. 33 Click OK 3 times.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Finish. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 30 In the Name dialog. select Wood . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 25 Click Modify.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Filled Region. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. in the Type Selector. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click Finish Sketch.5mm. click (Align). 40 On the Options Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. sketch the new region as shown. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click (Rectangle). verify that the thickness is 19mm. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. select Medium Lines. and select the right edge of the wood region.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 38 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.

44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 47 Click the reference plane. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. For Offset. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click 48 Click Modify. For Offset.42 On the Design Bar. (Align). click Ref Plane. enter 6mm. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER.

56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. For Offset. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). enter 0. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm. and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click Finish Sketch. 54 On the Tools toolbar. and select the bottom horizontal line. Select Chain. and press ENTER.

select Medium Lines. top. and right edges of the door panel region. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 3mm. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and click Open. 60 Select the left.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and press ENTER.rfa. 69 Select the bolt.2mm. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 58 In the Type Selector. 65 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 68 Click Modify. click Training Files. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line. enter 76. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the height dimension. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Load. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER.

click Detail Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. use the images as a guide.70 On the Design Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.rfa. 74 Select the expansion bolt. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 76 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . and click Open. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.

click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). 79 In the Type Selector. 80 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. click . click .78 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar.

88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. and on the Edit toolbar. 90 In the Type Selector. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown. 92 Select the line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 89 On the Design Bar. click (Mirror). click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines.

334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. enter 3mm. select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. and click to place the arc as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Component. 95 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select M_Break Line. click . 97 On the Options Bar. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.

108 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 105 In the drawing area.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 110 Select the dimension line. 106 Click to place the dimension. 107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial.

113 Under Text Fields.2. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. click Dimension. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. enter See Schedule. under Dimension Value. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . for Below. 114 Click OK. under Dimension Value. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and then click the dimension text. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension.5mmArial. and click the dimension text. select Replace With Text. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Replace With Text. 118 Select Modify to end the command.

click to create an arced leader. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader).121 Click OK. 123 Click OK. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. select the gypsum board region on the left. 125 In the Options Bar. and click to place the text. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and click Modify. Board. 127 Enter Gyp. 126 In the drawing area. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 128 Select the note. click Text.

131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and double-click East. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 339 .rvt.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 5 On the Options Bar. click Symbol. click Modify.rfa. click Training Files. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Number of Leaders.Hexagon. type 1. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Copy). 13 Select the tag. 12 On the Edit toolbar. under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. for Text. and click OK. click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. Creating a Note Block | 341 .

clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Edit toolbar. 16 For Tag. 15 For Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 18 Using the same method. (Mirror). click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click. 19 With the tag selected. type Repair existing door surround.14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. type B. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Options Bar. click Copy. and on the Options Bar.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. 22 Optionally. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Repair as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. using the table as a reference. Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean exterior brick wall.

Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type Exterior Construction Notes. type Description. for Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. and select Bold. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. On the Formatting tab. select Tag. select Exterior Construction Notes. expand Sheets (all). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Heading. Create. format. 29 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. type Mark. type 6 mm. verify that Arial is selected. 26 Click OK. for Header text. and click Add. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click Add.Elevations. and double-click A103 . 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Select Text. for the value. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 27 In the column header (text). select Tag. and for Alignment. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click OK. Clean cut and repair wall as required. for Note block name. select Center. On the Appearance tab. 28 In the Project Browser.

rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.Title Sheet. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. under Sheets (all). Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

select Sheet Number. The drawing list displays. On the Filter tab. 5 In the list title field. under Available fields. in the second field. and click Add. Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. and in the third field. for Sort by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. select Sheet Index.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. in the first field.Title Sheet. select does not equal. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 6 In the Project Browser. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. ■ 4 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click T . type T. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Filter by.

Training File Using Legends | 347 . you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. door frame schedule. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Modify. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 11 Save the file.9 On the Design Bar. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Finally. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. doors. For the text. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. windows. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. and door frames. and so on).

and click OK. for Name. type Legend Text.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Open Level Head .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 3mm. click Duplicate. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 For Text Size. click Edit/New.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. you create a text type with the necessary size. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 9 For Text Font. select Arial. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Symbol. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK twice. and click OK. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. for Name. click Text. type Typical Symbol Legend.

12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. verify that is selected. and for Leader. 16 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 . type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 14 Working from the top down. expand Sheets (all). and click to place it.

19 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .17 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Sheets. click Modify.Unit 18. 21 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 . 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 23 Save the file.

5 On the View Control Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and click OK. select Medium for Detail Level. select Section. For Host length. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and press ENTER. click Legend Component. For View. type 4th Floor Wall Types.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 1 : 50. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. type 900 mm. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 3 For Scale.rvt. for Name.

click Text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. and on the Options Bar. for Family. 12 In the Type Selector.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. The text note with leader is added to the legend. right-click Sheets (all). and drag it to the new sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text. 23 In the Project Browser. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . select Level 4.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.

354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Floor Plans. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. under Legends. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. 26 On the Design Bar. drag it onto the sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.

click (Match Type). indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select the Wall Type 2 component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. select Detail Level: Medium. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 In the floor plan view. 35 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar.

These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. double-click Level 4. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. or changes in building material availability. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. contractor inquiries. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .36 Optionally. click 37 Save the file. You can create a sequence of revisions.rvt.

the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type a date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When you use this option. In general. verify that Per Project is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. for Numbering. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 7 Under Show. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 5 For Description.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. if the active revision is number 1. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . When Issued is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. For example. In most instances. If you select Per Sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If Visible is not selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

9 Save the file. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click (Move). Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 3 Select the divider. click Modify. 4 On the Edit toolbar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Revision clouds have read-only properties. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. including revision number and revision date. you make changes to the project floor plan. 5 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.rvt. move the cursor up. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK. double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.

Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click near the partition you moved.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the Snaps dialog. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off. 11 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Revision Cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. and click OK.

17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. select 6. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

rvt. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. double-click Level 4. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Tags. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. the cloud is tagged as number 1. select Leader. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. click Training Files. Because you chose to number by project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 12 Save the file. 5 In the Tags dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 11 Click to place the tag.rfa. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. under Floor Plans. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. scroll down to Revision Clouds. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click OK. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click Load. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. and because the revision is the first in the project. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. You then issue a revision. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 10 In the drawing area.

6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed. and enter a date. you can no longer modify it. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. you prevent further changes to the revision. You can continue to add revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You do this by issuing the revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 7 For Description. NOTE After you issue a revision. under Sheets. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. with the description Relocate Door. select Issued. 9 Click OK. type Modify Paving Area. double-click A107 .rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and enter a date for the revision. 8 Add another revision row. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

Relocate Door to the revision cloud. in the drawing area.Unnamed. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 10 In the Project Browser. select the revision cloud. 17 Using the same method learned previously. click to add a revision clouds. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. double-click A107 . under Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 11 On the Drafting tab. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 20 On the Project Browser. for Revision. double-click Level 4. Working with Revisions | 363 . 3 . apply Seq. 19 To add tags. select Tag ➤ By Category. select Revision Cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet.Modify Paving Area. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Seq. 2 . 12 In the drawing area.

height. 26 In the drawing area. For each revision. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 25 Click OK twice. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. select the titleblock. Click Options. beginning with "D". for Sequence.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You do this so that the revision can be changed. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. and rotation) to the revision schedule. clear Issued. you edit the titleblock family. for Numbering. delete the first 3 characters. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. select Alphabetic.

Select Outline. for Build Schedule. click Yes. click Edit Family. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. select Bottom-up. click Yes. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Modify. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it above the schedule area. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and press DELETE. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 34 On the Design Bar. Working with Revisions | 365 . for Appearance. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules.27 On the Options Bar. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. right-click Revision Schedule. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Select Grid lines. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Clear Blank row before data. and click Properties. click Load into Projects. under Other. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the alert dialog. 33 Select the schedule header. click Edit. 38 In the Reload Family dialog.

40 Select the revision schedule header. for Heading. under Other. select 90° Counterclockwise. and on the Options Bar. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. right-click Revision Schedule. open the titleblock family for editing. select User defined. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and click Properties. 43 In the Element Properties dialog..The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 45 On the Appearance tab. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the revision schedule. click Edit. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. for Rotation on Sheet. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. With a user-defined height. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. for Height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 46 Click OK twice. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. When the height property is variable. for Formatting. enter Rev.

Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes.

under Sheets. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. double-click T . 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.Title Sheet. click to add text without a leader. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. under Sheets. click Text.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. double-click T .JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. for Leader.

with the new text box still selected.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 6 Select the text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 11 Save the file. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.

9 Click to place the image on the sheet.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. This step has been completed for you. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. 10 On the Design Bar. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.xls. and saved as Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click File menu ➤ Print. for Name.Unit 18. for File name. 3 In Microsoft Excel.JPG. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Training Files. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. This exercise demonstrates a common method. click Modify. select the document writer. type Fixture Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.mdi. 12 Save the file. under Sheets. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 4 Under Printer. click Desktop.rvt. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. and click Save. This process may vary from system to system. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.

you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. To effectively document this project. or footprint. 371 . called dependent views. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Aviary. and click OK. right-click Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Rename. select the crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 2 In the Project Browser. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The dependent view opens. enter Level 2 . under Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 4 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar.

10 Click in the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. for Name. and click Rename. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout.

18 On the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . and on the Zoom flyout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click (Hide Crop Region). 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Matchline. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.

Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and click OK. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Aviary. click Level 2 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 33 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. for Line Weight. expand Sheets. under Floor Plans.Unnamed. right-click A101 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. for Name. 27 Under Matchline. click the Annotation Objects tab. select Double Dash. and drag it onto the sheet. select 9. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 26 In the Object Styles dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter Level 2 Aviary. 31 In the Project Browser.

Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. under Floor Plans. for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . double-click Level 2.Aviary is selected. and place the Level 2 . click Modify.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Zoom To Fit. for Target view. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

46 In the Project Browser. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 49 If. 48 Select the crop region. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. double-click Level 2 . click (Show Crop Region). right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.Aviary. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 47 On the View Control Bar. click the far right control.

under Floor Plans. and click OK.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. expand Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). but are not placed on sheets. right-click Level 2. and click Apply Dependent Views. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 54 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Zoom flyout. select all views in the list. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 52 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view.

rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Zoom To Fit. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout.

cropping the view to the lab building.The dependent view opens. select the Crop Region. 9 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 7 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and drag it toward the center of the view.Left. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. for Name. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.Right. 8 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click South Elevation. and click Rename.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. The perspective view displays. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. click Camera.

Creating a Perspective View | 405 . under Floor Plans. as necessary.3 Zoom out. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. If the camera is not shown in the view. and adjust the field of vision. With the camera shown. in the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. double-click Site. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and select the crop boundary. Depending on camera placement. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. right-click 3D View 1. as shown. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard.

Day. enter Exterior . 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog.6 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file. and click Rename. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407.

you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.rvt. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. under 3D Views. and render a daytime view of the exterior. modify render settings. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . double-click Exterior .Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You then duplicate the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

select Spring Equinox. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. under Background. You create a location and time for the rendering.Santa Monica. click (Show Rendering Dialog). The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If a background image is required. 3 In the Rendering dialog. for Sun. 7 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 8 Under Quality. select Medium. In this case. 3pm. select Edit/New. You adjust cloud settings as required. 6 Click OK twice. and click Render. enter Spring Equinox . for Setting. select Sky: Cloudy. for New. 5 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.

For Files of type.9 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. click Export. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 13 Close the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. After the image is rendered. click Show the model.

press and hold SHIFT. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . and click OK. right-click Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. under Group Options. click Dialog). To select a sequential list. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Group Options. click Render. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . dialog.Night view open. for Name.Flat Round : 60W . click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. add 30 :Sconce Light .120V to the Pool Lights group.Night. under 3D Views. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W .Day.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Scheme. click New. and click Artificial Lights.Day view to Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . and click OK. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Night. 27 In the Rendering dialog. enter Pool House Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . and click Move to Group. 22 Using the same method. under Lighting. under Ungrouped Lights. for Name. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. enter Pool Lights. click New. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. 16 With the Exterior .Exterior . select Exterior: Artificial only. select the first light. 25 Using the same method. and select the last light. on the View Control Bar. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.120V. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.

click Show the model. After the image is rendered. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . click Adjust Exposure. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. In this example.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and click OK. under Image. you change the brightness of the exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. for Exposure Value. enter 4. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.

rvt. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. render the views. Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

4 In the Type Selector. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. select RPC Female : YinYin. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 5 On the Design Bar. ■ (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. the person’s line of sight. double-click Level 1. Adding RPC People | 413 . and place the component inside the pool house. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Component. click Modify. 6 Select the figure. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. you can enable this option. By default. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK 3 times. select Cast Reflections. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 14 Save the file. under Parameters. click Edit. 13 On the Design Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Modify. for Render Appearance Properties. under Identity Data.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.rvt. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.

You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.The perspective view displays. and click OK. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Section Box.

select the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South. in addition to the 3D view. under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click Level 1. 11 In the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 8 In the Project Browser.

14 In the 3D view. 13 In the South Elevation view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click. select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 17 Save the file. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. To create a daytime view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. and render the interior view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.

select Interior: Artificial only. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK.rvt. click Render. under 3D Views. 3 On the View Control Bar. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Click Artificial Lights. and click OK. and click Rename. for Scheme. After these settings are established. c_Pool_House_in_progress. clear Pool Lights. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 8 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. enter Interior . under Lighting. right-click 3D View 1. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. click (Show Rendering Dialog). These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you turn them off for this scene. 7 Under Quality. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. You can specify a lower quality. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.Night. select Draft. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.

For sunlit interiors. You create a view for the interior during the day. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.Night. select Edit. the daylight portals can be turned on. click Copy To Custom. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. select Spring Equinox . In this case. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Curtain Walls. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. The preset schemes are read-only. By default they are turned off.Day. (Show Rendering Dialog). for Scheme.9 Close the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. 3pm.Santa Monica. 13 In the Rendering dialog. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. and click Render. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. click 14 For Setting. right-click Interior . and click OK. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. select Interior: Sun only. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . you must create a custom setting. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. in order to turn on daylight portals. select Region. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. For more information on daylight portals. for Sun.

enter 1.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the column on the right. For Saturation. click Properties). Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. enter 10. click Show the model. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and close the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. In the next steps. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. under Image. and on the Options Bar.

After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. As size and DPI are increased. 24 In the Materials dialog. click the dimensions for Size. For Rotate. and click Render. select Printer. select Wood. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. For Width. under Output Settings. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. For Amount. for Setting. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. 29 In the Rendering dialog.6. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . Click OK. click OK. add a bump map to create texture. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Unfinished. You change the varnish setting. and on the Options Bar. clear Region. and click OK. 26 Click Update Preview. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. enter 90. select the crop boundary. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 23 With the column still selected. For Bump.22 In the Element Properties dialog. the render time increases significantly. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 5''. for Resolution. 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Based on wood grain. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select High. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. In a plan view. Usually. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. independent of the Revit Architecture software. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model.The rendered image displays. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. or section view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. elevation. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

verify that Perspective is selected. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and change unit formats as desired. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. expand Floor Plans. If you prefer to use metric values.rvt. proceeds through the dining room. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Walkthrough. and click the tab in the context menu. expand Views (all). Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Training Files. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

11 Under Change. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 12 On the View menu. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). If it is not. 14 Click . verify that Field of view is selected. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 1. enter 16''. for Width. and select the crop boundary. for Frame. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 16 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. and for Height. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Click . 13 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 9''.

double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 2 On the Options Bar. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.The walkthrough plays. c_Townhouse. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click Edit Walkthrough. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. press ESC. proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click (Element Properties).

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 7 Click the third key frame position. for Controls. select Path. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown.

8 If you want to save this exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. specifying the number of frames. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. . c_Townhouse.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Model Graphics Style. shading with edges. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 9 To play the walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. for Compressor. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. double-click Walkthrough 1. select <Shading>. and click OK. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. and click Save. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. under Walkthroughs. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. hidden line. click Edit Walkthrough. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. When you export the walkthrough. The walkthrough is recorded. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height.rvt. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. shading. 3 Under Format. on the Options Bar. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. under Output Length. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. for Frames/sec. reducing the size of the image. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. or rendering. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. enter 15. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial. More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. 431 . you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

Creating a Solar Study . as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (SteeringWheels). click Training Files. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.rvt. expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 4 On the View toolbar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Courtyard View In this exercise. click shown. as shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.

4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Modify. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. as shown. click Save As. 6 Click the view boundary to select it.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . expand 3D Views. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. you create a section cutaway view.Courtyard View. if necessary. and click OK. click Section. under Floor Plans. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 01 Entry.5 On the Design Bar. enter Solar Study . 3 On the Design Bar. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

13 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 11 On the SteeringWheel. double-click the section head.5 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Modify. expand Sections. click . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1. (SteeringWheels). 6 To view the section. click 10 On the View toolbar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click Rename.

some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 6 In the Rename View dialog. including the house. 18 On the File menu. and click Rename. 5 In the Project Browser. 17 To hide the section box. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway.14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. under 3D Views. and click Rename. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . then select Medium. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Typical plan views. click Callout. do not display many elements in 3D. right-click {3D}. then Fine. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you create a plan cutaway view. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. clear Section Boxes. 15 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click . In some cases. click Save. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. as shown. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.

12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. so you can see into the building from the top. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 16 On the View Control Bar.8 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 9 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. as shown. as shown. 15 Select the Roof. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.

under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. click Save. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. right-click {3D}. and click OK. 21 On the File menu.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . and preview the effects of each study as an animation.17 On the View Control Bar. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 19 In the Rename View dialog.

date. and time. 2 On the View Control Bar. For the Multi-Day solar study. MA. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. Click the Single-Day tab. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and time range. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. For this study. or multi-day solar study. enter Summer Solstice. you specify the location. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. expand 3D Views. click click OK. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 9 In the Name dialog. and click Duplicate.Creating Solar Studies . date range. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click . CA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can create a still. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. USA. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. select Los Angeles. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 3 Select Cast Shadows. For the Single-Day solar study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. for City. 4 For Sun Position. single-day.Boston. you specify the location.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Los Angeles. leave the slider at 50. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. expand Views (all). 5 Click the Single-Day tab. and click OK. click . 10 Under Place. . USA is selected.

17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 In this case. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 2008. and click Duplicate. select December 22. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles. Under Frame. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice. for Date. Los Angeles. ■ For Time Interval. under Frame. click . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. for Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Los Angeles is selected. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. on the Single-Day tab. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click Save. enter 20 and press ENTER. confirm that Summer Solstice. For Time Range. select June 22. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 2008. click . and click OK. enter 10 and press ENTER. Clear Ground Plane at Level. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed.

select Summer Solstice.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 13 On the View Control Bar. . click . on the Single-Day tab. click Text. click To display the next sequential frame. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. under Floor Plans. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. . 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click To play the animation from start to finish. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. for Sun Position. The solar study animation plays. click . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click OK. Los Angeles. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. approximately as shown.■ To display the next key frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click . double-click 01 Entry.

click Lines. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. On the Options Bar. as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 8 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click . 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. Click and enter Dining. expand 3D Views.

select Section Boxes. 15 To hide the section box. as shown. 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. On the Annotation Categories tab. 14 Click outside of the section box. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and enter 5 to 50. On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ For Frames per second. under Output Length.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 11 To display the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. on the Single-Day tab. click OK. verify that the value is set to 15. if necessary. and click OK. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Frame Range. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Los Angeles. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.

rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Under Format. select Winter Solstice. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 3 For Sun Position. enter 450 in the first field (width). you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. for Compressor. verify that Hidden Line is selected. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. select Frame Range. verify that the value is set to 15.Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. you open each image. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To view the animation. verify that Hidden Line is selected. under Output Length. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. of the animation separately. For File Name. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . For Dimensions. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. For Files of Type. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For Frames per second. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .■ ■ Under Format. or frame. select AVI Files. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. and enter 5 to 10. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click OK. Click OK. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. or any single-frame format.Los Angeles. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. select PNG.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. click the Desktop icon. such as JPEG. as shown: 9 On the File menu. enter 450 in the first field (width). Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. TIFF. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. depending on the Frame Range. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. For File name. under 3D Views. click Save.■ For Dimensions. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . BMP. Click OK. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. or GIF. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 8 Click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. In this example. For Files of Type. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

5 Select the roof.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .Los Angeles . 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate. and click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. for File name enter 2pm . and click OK. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. specify 2:00 pm. USA. and on the View Control Bar. 12 In the Name dialog. clear Section Boxes. click the Multi-Day tab. For Time Interval. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK.Boston. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 8 On the View Control Bar.Week Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select One week. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. For Time. MA. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Click the Desktop icon. click OK. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . model views.West or North . and click Save. for File Name. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and click OK. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and annotations in non-drafting views. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. In the Length/Format dialog. double-click 01 Entry. such as East . you mirror all model elements. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. for Compressor. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. under Floor Plans. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.South. 17 On the View Control Bar. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. When you mirror a project.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

West axis. 6 On the Standard toolbar. The project is mirrored along the East . you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. under 3D Views. select East .West. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 2 In the drawing area. For additional information.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Then. select the roof. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 5 In the warning dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In this exercise. right-click. click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. 8 For Sun Position. click . click the Still tab. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 5 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. click . and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Under Date and Time. select Cast Shadows. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. click .3 On the View Control Bar. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Still tab. click Apply. For example. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. Orienting to True North | 449 . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. select Summer Solstice.

19 In the Project Browser. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click . NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. the view settings must be set for True North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. select True North. When a project is started. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right click 01 Entry. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. under Floor Plans. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. for Orientation. 14 On the View Control Bar. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Properties. double-click 01 Entry. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 18 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. This process establishes the view setting to True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click the Still tab. click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 15 For Sun Position.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

as shown. click toward the top of the screen. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction. Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. The floor plan rotates in the view.

click the Still tab. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. enter True North Orientation. select True North. and click Element Properties. and click Rename. click . and click OK. and click Properties. 27 In the Rename View dialog. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 28 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 25 In the Project Browser. right-click.23 In the Project Browser. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 32 On the View Control Bar. 33 For Sun Position. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. select Project North. for Orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. under 3D Views. for Orientation. and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. and click Apply. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. right-click 01 Entry. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select True North Orientation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

Click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. Click Save. for Dimensions. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Desktop icon.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. enter 600 in the first field. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. under Format. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Orienting to True North | 453 . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. click Summer Solstice. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. In the Length/Format dialog. for Compressor. For File Name. For Files of Type. click the Single-Day tab. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK.

The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. select Medium. In the Name dialog. For Sun. click Render.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. (Show Rendering Dialog). 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. for Setting. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 1 In the Project Browser. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. select Winter Solstice. Rendered views do not have this limitation. and click OK. under Settings. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and 2:00 PM. In this exercise. and exporting it as a JPEG image. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select 12/22. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under Quality. select Interior: Sun only. Since a rendered image is temporary. under 3D Views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. 3 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. and click OK. and click Duplicate. for Scheme. capturing it. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. select Edit/New.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Under Lighting. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering.

click Export. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser.6 In the Rendering dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. verify that JPEG Files is selected. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. and click OK. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project. and click Save. click Desktop. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . For Files of type.

456 .

In this series of exercises. Co-house. When organizing presentation graphics. elevations. however. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. a consultant. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. type. you explore the stylistic approach. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Other tools in the software. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Using the pre-built building model. 457 . For the realistic approach. and section boxes. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. sections. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you can choose between realism and stylistics. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. and details. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. They include rendering. In this tutorial. advanced model graphics. length. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. or the client. linework.

you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan.

and click Rename. under Floor Plans. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click OK. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . exit the menu. click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files.rvt. Cnst. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click 2nd Flr. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

Notice the immediate change in the line weights. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. No annotations display in the view. Down Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and clear DOWN Text. UP Text. and click Save. dimensions. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. elevations. 8 Click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Annotation Categories tab. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . sections. navigate to the folder of your choice. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and Up Arrow. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other annotations in this view. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. 7 Under Visibility. 11 In the Save As directory. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click the Scale control and select 1:100.

8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Cast Shadows. double-click it in the Project Browser. For Sun Position. select By Date. specify 35. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. At that place. and select 1st Flr. you can select any city. NOTE For this step. for Date and Time. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 9 For City. 6 Under Settings. you can create. click . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. select Boston. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. and click OK. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 10/27. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Place tab. modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Contrast. Cnst. Time and Place. 7 For Place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. select Sun and Shadow Settings. MA. click . the darker the shadows. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows Off). 1:00 PM. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. however. click OK. 12 Click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. Within a project. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. If you select a different city. The higher the number. 2 On the View Control Bar. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. on the Still tab.rvt.

This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. for Sun Position. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. . click (Shadows On). 19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. clear Ground Plane at Level. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK.

select Arch Portrait.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . right-click the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View. and click to place it. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click View. and click OK. click Modify. The viewport displays at the cursor. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and notice the view title.

click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Edit/New. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. To accomplish this. and click Activate View. for Show Title. 12 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. For this analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. select No. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. under Graphics. click . and click OK. The viewport no longer displays a view title.

18 On the Options Bar. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Edit/New. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Filled Region. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. If necessary. 17 In the Type Selector. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and the boundary of the region. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. fill properties. select Invisible lines. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. When you finish drawing the chain. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Chain. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Region Properties.

Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Name. for Sheet Name.24 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. under Identity Data. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. and click OK. and click View Properties. enter Solid Black. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click OK. under Graphics. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. select Solid fill. and click Deactivate View. enter Presentation. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. click . 28 In the Type Properties dialog.

Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise.

16 In the Name dialog. Time and Place. 9 Click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click OK. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. on the Model Categories tab. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll up. and click Rename. expand the Doors category. click Duplicate. By changing the angle of the sun. specify 2:30 PM. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Visibility. and click OK. click in the Walls row. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Override. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click . 3 In the Rename View dialog. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. right-click Copy of South. under Pattern Overrides. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. exit the menu. under Elevations. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click OK.2 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and clear Elevation Swing. specify 35. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 12 Under Shadow. select By Date. select Cast Shadows. 13 For Contrast. 18 For Time. clear Visible. click in the drawing area. under Settings. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click (Shadows Off). enter Presentation South Elevation. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 On the View Control Bar. 14 For Sun Position. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Visibility.

Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Add View. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.The viewport displays a view title.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

Cnst. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt. select 1: 100. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adjust the controls to modify the extents. click Section.

as shown. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. this view needs to be rotated 180°.Section 2 is added to the building model. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. select 1 : 100. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.

In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and clear Elevation Swing. expand the Doors category. scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 15 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. and click Rename. 17 Under Visibility. 10 In the Project Browser. click Override. clear Visible. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click in the Walls row. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. enter Presentation Section 2.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click The crop regions no longer display. When you select the crop region. 20 Click OK. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. (Hide Crop Region). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 22 On the View Control Bar. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 24 Proceed with the next exercise.

double-click Presentation Section 2. 6 In the Name dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. in the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Click Apply. 3 On the View Control Bar.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. under Sections (Callout 1). specify the following: Under Shadow. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. In addition. click . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. In the steps that follow. select Cast Shadows.rvt. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Contrast.

Select Relative to View. click (Shadows On). TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Directly. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Azimuth. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Altitude. Silhouette Edges. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. was added to this training file for training purposes. Click OK. specify 70°. select Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 135°. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Silhouette style. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. click OK. NOTE The line style.

and click to place the selected view.rvt. double-click A105 . 3 In the Views dialog. under Sheets (all). you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Presentation. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.

you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. and press Enter. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . To rotate an object. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. click (Rotate). Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. The section needs to be rotated 180°. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. double-click Section 2. Using a clock as a reference. The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). you click to specify the start radius. In the steps that follow.5 In the Type Selector. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.

Presentation. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. double-click A105 .The callout rotates 180°. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

enter Presentation Section 1. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Rename View dialog. click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation. 6 In the Project Browser. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New View Template dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique.rvt. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Section 1. and click OK.

The furniture. select Presentation. lighting fixtures. under Graphics. click Add View. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. annotations. and click Add View to Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Rotation on Sheet. and click Deactivate View. 18 Right-click the viewport. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and elevation swings no longer display. under Names. 12 In the Views dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 .Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.

such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise.

click Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . right-click Callout of Section 1. select the callout. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.rvt. and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you add the callout. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the Project Browser.

486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. clear Annotation Crop. enter Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties.5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the crop region. double-click Presentation Callout.

specify 22. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For Scale Value 1. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Activate View.Presentation. select Custom. click Add View. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. double-click A105 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Modify. select Viewport : Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Filled Region. and click Deactivate View. In the steps that follow. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). and move it to the position shown below. When finished. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and make adjustments as necessary. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Edit/New.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Region Properties. double-click Presentation Callout. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. activate the viewport.

27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. on the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. When you are finished. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. 28 In the Project Browser. select Solid fill. click .Presentation. click Filled Region. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and click OK 3 times. click Finish Sketch. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .25 In the Type Properties dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.

490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Show Crop Region). 34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click . The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar.

35 On the View Control Bar. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. click (Hide Crop Region). 38 Proceed with the next lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 .

492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows Off). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar. and apply shadows to the views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under 3D Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control. double-click Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. and click 1 : 200.

and click OK. For Azimuth. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 135°.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Cnst. under Extents. specify 35. enter Isometric 2. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Select 1st Flr. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. select Silhouette Edges. Select Ground Plane at Level. right-click Isometric. select Directly. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. Click OK. Select Relative to View. 13 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 1. 15 In the Rename View dialog. select Cast Shadows. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. in the list. For Altitude. For Contrast. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. For Sun Position. for Silhouette style. double-click Isometric 2. 12 In the Rename View dialog. specify 45°. and click OK. and click Rename. select Section Box. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished.19 Select the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box.

28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. select Viewport : Presentation. Next. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 25 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. 23 In the Rename View dialog. enter Isometric 3. and click OK. the stairs and railings may display. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 3. When you are finished.Presentation. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. you can adjust the plane location. under Sheets (all). or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. and click OK. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. clear Section Boxes.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. 27 Select the section box. under 3D Views. make a copy of the view. If desired. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click A105 . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser.

496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.

for Fill Patterns. 39 For Background. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Transparent. click Edit.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit/New. 41 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Region Properties. The image below shows the redrawn lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. select Concrete. 40 Click OK twice. On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. 42 Using the drawing tools. 36 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 46 Click OK twice. and click Deactivate View. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. for Fill Pattern. click Region Properties. click Edit/New.43 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 47 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.

After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. click Camera. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. The view opens immediately. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. under Floor Plans.rvt. you add it to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.

9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Sun Position. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify 35. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. click . For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). for Name. specify the following: Under Shadow.

select Section Box. 12 Select the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. Grips display on each plane of the section box. and click OK. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. A section box now cuts through the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Extents. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click OK. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). 18 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. for Width. 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Change. 17 Under Model Crop Size. click Size. you must specify the actual size of the image. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 19 To hide the section box.14 Select the crop region. enter 165 mm. click (Hide Crop Region). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views.

Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. click Text. double-click it in the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 6 mm.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Edit/New. click .rvt. select a font. enter Title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. enter Description. specify a text size of 40 mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Text. and click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . click Edit/New. and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text : Title. Annotating the Analytique | 503 .

19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. click Modify.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. After you import the SketchUp model. curtain walls. 507 . such as walls. In this tutorial.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. that compose the building. you create a small building from the front mass form. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

select All.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. click Training Files. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. or select from a list. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rte. 6 In the Save As dialog. click OK. click Browse. click the Massing tab. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Click the Sketchup file. under Template file. For Colors. visible elements. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. For Layers. enter Import SketchUp. you create a Revit Architecture project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 9 In the informational dialog. select Auto-Detect. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.skp. for File name. click Create Mass. and not in the library. For Import units. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. enter SketchUp Model. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. buildings. select Preserve. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 10 In the Name dialog. select SketchUp Files. click OK. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. Double-click the Common folder. and click Save. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Files of type.

select Level 1. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 17 In the warning dialog. For Place at level. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. Level 1 is the only choice. 14 On the View toolbar. click . In a new project. select Manual . An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click Finish Mass. such as walls.Center. depending on the complexity of the project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. 16 On the Design Bar. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click the Close button. Click Open.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. curtain walls. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.

3 In the Type Selector. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and roofs. for Level. After you create the building from the mass faces. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. select the face so that it highlights in red. click Roof by Face. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form.18 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements.400mm displays. curtain walls. such as walls. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. that compose the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. and on the View Control Bar.

Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. A roof is created from the mass face. 9 On the Options Bar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click to display masses. To see the new roof. 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.

click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 12 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Modify to end the command. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Type Selector. for Loc Line.15 On the Design Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click roofs that you created. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior.200mm displays. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click Wall by Face. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

29 Select the left face of the left mass.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.

click Create System. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 31 Using the same technique. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 32 On the View toolbar.

Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and select it. click Roof by Face.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Create System. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Wall by Face. click Curtain System.

click Wall by Face.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. under Floor Plans. specify a point to place the camera. and select the mass face shown below. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click Camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Below the right corner of the view. double-click Level 1.

Click the frame to display its grips. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. as shown. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target. 48 On the View toolbar. roofs. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. click your building in the view.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. to view only the walls. The perspective view created by the camera displays.

Click OK. for Justification. 50 On the Options Bar. click . and select the left curtain system in the view. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. select Center. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. and move the roof edges as shown below. 63 In the Type Selector. 55 Right-click. double-click 3D View 1. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and click Cancel to end the command. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 56 In the Project Browser. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door.54 Select each roof to display its grips. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 On the View toolbar.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

To switch panel types. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. or you can use a specific curtain system command. For example. you select the grid. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you need to select a panel. This affects the entire curtain system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 525 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To change grids. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and mullions. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. panel. to resize the system. click Training Files.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. Unlike windows. and they are not windows. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. grid lines. Like windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit.rvt. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Like walls. and you can change these elements individually. you need to change the length of the wall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

click Wall. and double-click Ground Floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and double-click Southeast Isometric. Creating an Entrance | 527 .

13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and click (Properties). using curtain grids. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.11 Select the curtain system. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . top constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top and base attachments. Click OK. enter 1200. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. For Top Offset.

and click OK.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. click Curtain Grid. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. right-click Elevation 1 . click Modify.a. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. and click Rename. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 25 On the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area.

and SEVENTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. and click OK. click Modify. FOURTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. select SECOND FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FIFTH FLOOR. while pressing CTRL.26 While pressing CTRL. Click to place another grid line. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. Click to create a vertical grid. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. SIXTH FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. one larger than the other.

Instead of using the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. click Add or Remove Segments. The two segments are removed. The segment line style changes to dashed. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid.

Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click in any white space to exit the editor. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 43 Delete the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide.

under Floor Plans.Next. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 52 On the Type Selector. click view. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 57 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click Modify. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 55 In the Project Browser. on the new curtain system you added. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. . click Training Files. The panel changes to a double door. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa. 54 On the Design Bar. not as curtain panels. Now. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 56 In the Project Browser. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Entrance Elevation. They are part of the curtain panel category. These panels schedule as doors.

64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click System Panel : Solid. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 63 Click OK twice. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 61 With the panel still selected. and the solid panels display in white. The glazed panels display in blue.60 On the Type Selector. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar.

5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.68 On the File menu. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Mullion.rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. click Save As. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.

however. You are going to change some mullion joins. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . 10 Delete the mullions below them. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. there are a few that you do not want. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.6 On the Options Bar. clickModify. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. so you remove them next. select All Empty Segments. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors.

14 Click the top mullion control.Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you can also right-click. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. click Modify. Finally. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 17 Save the file. 16 In the Project Browser. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 15 On the Design Bar.

For Top Offset. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 7 On the Options Bar. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. double-click GROUND FLOOR. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Finally. Click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Wall. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. enter 1200. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. Curved Curtain System | 539 . (Arc passing through three points). 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you add a curtain system using the wall command. under Floor Plans. for Top Constraint.

13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 14 In the Project Browser. Next. Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. You are going to use one of these snaps points. click Curtain Grid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. eighths. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Elevations. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. double-click East.

you change some panels in the system. 16 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. click Modify. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. select Basic Wall: Generic . 18 In the Type Selector. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Next.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. to filter out all 19 Save the file. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. under Elevations.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rft. . 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . enter 100. 12 On the Options Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar. click . click Model Lines. click Training Files. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 6 On the Options Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 9 Select the extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. for Depth. 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. clear Chain. click Finish Sketch. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. select Glass. and click .

All the panels change to the custom panel you created. right-click. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa family.Pattern. 21 In the Type Selector.Pattern. All fourth floor panels are selected. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Change Walls Orientation. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 24 On the View toolbar. 19 In the Project Browser. click 25 On the View toolbar.Pattern. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . and return to the project file. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 23 Right-click. under Floor Plans. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. select Curtain Panel .14 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. click Modify.

All fifth floor panels are selected. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. select System Panel . you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. right-click. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 30 Save the file. under Floor Plans. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 27 In the Project Browser. All the panels change to the solid panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 29 In the Type Selector. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Solid. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.

except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 1 In the Project Browser. For vertical mullions. select Mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. enter 8. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click ■ ■ For Sides. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Select Radius. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. double-click East. click Lines. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. . click Mullion. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). for Profile Usage. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. under Elevations. and click OK. Click again to specify the ending point. and select it. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files.rft.

click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. click Detail Component. and return to the project file. After the new profile is loaded. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 20 Select the detail component. it can be added as a mullion type. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. click Training Files.11 On the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. click Mullion. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.detail. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. and click OK. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. under 3D Views. clear Fine. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. click Visibility. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click (SteeringWheels). and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click . 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.

and click OK. right-click. select Circular Mullion for Family. select All Empty Segments. 36 Under Construction. click Modify. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. under Floor Plans. You have placed more mullions than you want. 37 Click OK twice. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 40 On the Design Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 33 Click Edit/New. 38 On the Options Bar. 44 Save the file.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser. 43 Press DELETE. double-click GROUND FLOOR. for Profile. click Duplicate.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls. a storefront system. click Pick Walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 4 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . In this lesson. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and a ruled curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. make custom curtain panels and mullions. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 5 On the Options Bar. select Defines slope. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and you can click to select them all.

double-click Southeast Isometric. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. Sloped Glazings | 549 . under 3D Views. 17 On the View Control Bar. 18 Save the file. enter 600. click Finish Roof. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select Entire Grid Line. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Mullion. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. click Modify.

4 In the Type Selector. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. select Unconnected for Height. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. and enter 2400. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Storefront System In this exercise. click Wall. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Edit/New. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. For this wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. and click . you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. Storefront System | 551 . click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 8 Click the temporary dimension. To see how the grid layout is defined. which is specified in the type. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. even if the wall height changes. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and press ENTER. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the storefront wall. enter 10200 mm. under 3D Views. double-click Southeast Isometric. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click Modify.

This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. center. or end. and Offset. 20 Save the file. In this exercise. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 19 Select a curtain grid. double-click Southeast Isometric. you find Number. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 16 Click OK. see the Revit Architecture help. 1 In the Project Browser. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Angle. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. enter 15. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. By setting the Angle value. select All Empty Segments. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Justification. 18 On the Options Bar. click Mullion.

making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and highlight the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click Curtain Grid. Next. 10 Select the panel. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. click Modify. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. A panel between the 2 lines is created. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. and click . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.

15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 16 In the Type Selector. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. right-click. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally. and then eighths. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. quarters. 18 Save the file.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters.

556 .

Roofs 15 In this lesson. gable. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 557 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. click Training Files. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.rvt. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In this exercise. mansard. In the left pane of the Open dialog. gutters. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. You do not need to create the work plane. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia. In this tutorial. shed. In addition. In this lesson. and low sloped roofs. including hip. and open Metric\m_Roofs.

expand Floor Plans. 4 Click OK. centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and double-click Level 1.1 In the Project Browser. and so on). Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Ref Plane. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. click the blue square on the witness line. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. select Name. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. expand Views (all). To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. select Chain. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . expand Views (all). press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Type 1). Next. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. click Modify.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 18 Select the edge of the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and select the second wall. 21 In the Project Browser. press TAB. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

26 On the View toolbar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

m_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. expand Floor Plans.rvt.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. expand Views (all). Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. and click Yes. click Pick Walls. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 5 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. verify that Defines slope is selected. and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Garage Roof.

11 Press CTRL. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Modify. click the model. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. and on the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click (Properties). (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Dimensions. 15 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. select both slope definition lines. By default.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. and click OK.

When you complete the roof.rvt. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and enter 600 for Overhang. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. m_Roofs. press TAB. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Views (all). you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and double-click Level 3. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.

12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.6 Click to select all the walls. 15 On the Options bar. Next. 10 On the View menu. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. sketch the chimney opening. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. click Finish Roof. click (Rectangle). 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.18 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. select Defines slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.

and click (Pick Lines). trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Trim/Extend). select the left vertical slope definition line. 7 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. clear Defines Slope. Next.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. close the roof sketch.

) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 14 Under Constraints. 17 On the View toolbar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Finish Roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Next. and click OK. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Modify. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 18 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (SteeringWheels). Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 On the View toolbar.

22 Using the same method that you used previously. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). join the two remaining walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Next. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.21 Click (SteeringWheels). 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house.

rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 6 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0 for Overhang. 10 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click (Trim/Extend). and enter 300 for Overhang. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical roof line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. expand Views (all). 9 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. clear Defines Slope. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. press TAB. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and double-click Level 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

you add a slope-defining line. m_Roofs. click 20 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.rvt. and click OK. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. expand Views (all).11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 19 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and press ENTER. select Defines slope. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. expand 3D Views. click Roof Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click 3D. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (SteeringWheels).

add two new slope arrows. click Modify. expand Views (all). change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click (Pick Lines). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and enter 600 for Offset. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 9 On the Tools menu. Before you can add slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. expand Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow. clear Defines Slope. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. and double-click Level 2. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 7 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Next.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

m_Roofs. select Slope for Specify.rvt. click Modify.15 to add the second slope arrow. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 3 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click OK. click Edit. and click 19 Under Constraints. select both slope arrows. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the adjacent eave heights must align. 18 Press CTRL. expand Views (all). (Properties). expand Floor Plans. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. When you sketch a hip roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 1 In the Project Browser. When eave heights differ.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 16 Repeat steps 13 . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 20 Under Dimensions. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click Garage Roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.

on the Options Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. under Dimensions. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 10 On the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 14 If you want to save your changes. select a method to align the eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Align Eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. select Defines Slope. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. click Save As. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the File menu. and click OK. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. (Properties). 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The eave lines display with a dimension.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. When aligning eaves.

you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. under Constraints. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. expand Elevations. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.rvt. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. (Properties). you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click North.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.

click Finish Roof. and double-click Level 3. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Lines. and then select Defines slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the View toolbar. click (Pick Lines). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and select the remaining three lines. 14 On the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Dimensions. click . expand Views (all). 7 In the Project Browser.

click Save As.17 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. After you add the roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add a roof to a building shell.

4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. verify that Defines slope is not selected. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 3 On the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.

select Steel Truss . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.Because the walls are not continuous. 11 On the Design Bar.EPDM.Insulation on Metal Deck . and click OK. click Finish Roof. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click Roof Properties. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. for Type.

under Floor Plans. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. The roof has been created. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. click (Draw Split Lines). In the next steps. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. and click to select it. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 16 On the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 18 Move the cursor down. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 20 Using the same method.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . (Add points). exact placement of the points is not important. 23 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next. You modify the points individually. In this exercise.

25 Using the same method. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. and press ENTER.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar.

including the interior edges of the roof regions. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 29 On the Design Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. click (Properties).27 Press and hold CTRL. 31 Select the roof slab. click Modify. and select all of the roof edges. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. enter 4''. for Elevation. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.

and soffits. By making the insulation layer variable. Gutters. gutters. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Save As. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Creating Fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Edit.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 37 If you want to save your changes. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. After you create a roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. Gutters. for Structure. and Soffits on page 586. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. under Construction. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. gutters. select Variable. The entire slab is sloped. for the Thermal/Air Layer. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Edit/New. you learn how to create roof fascia. and Soffits In this lesson. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 36 View the results in the section view. you can easily create its fascia. Creating Fascia. on the File menu.

click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. under Construction. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Training Files. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 3 Press CTRL. and click OK twice. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Built-up Fascia.rfa. click (Properties). 5 On the Options Bar.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click Open. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and open Common\c_Condominium. and click OK. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 13 On the Design Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters on page 588. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.rvt.

Creating Soffits on page 590. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. Creating Gutters | 589 .3 In the Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click in the Value field for Material. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. . and click OK three times. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog.

you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. 3 On the Design Bar. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views. expand Floor Plans. c_Condominium.rvt. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. expand Views (all). Creating Soffits | 591 . 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D.

on the File menu. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. and open Common\c_Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. under Length. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 2 In the Project Units dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Training Files. If you are using metric units. 593 . Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. select mm. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 3 Under Area. click Project Units. Click OK. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. your values will be different. For Unit Suffix. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. select Square meters. In the final exercise. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. select Millimeters. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. select m2. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click the Room Calculations tab. 9 Click Cancel. click OK. Click OK. click the Area Schemes tab. right-click in the Design Bar. For Unit Suffix. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. select 2 decimal places. and click Room and Area. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. it is not necessary in this exercise. expand Views (all).■ ■ ■ For Rounding. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click Settings. or 0. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. the system-computed height defaults to the level.

rather than the area tag. click Area Plan. you must manually add these boundary lines. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. To modify the area. under Views (all). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Click OK. forming a closed loop. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. When you select Yes in this dialog. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 13 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click Area. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must select one of the reference lines. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. If you select No.

Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. and store area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. When you pick the walls. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. If you do not select this option. click Area Boundary. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Click OK. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Next. When you add area boundary lines. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click ■ ■ . click Area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name.23 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. and click to select the area.

598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Click OK.■ Click OK. click Area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Office area for Area Type. 32 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ .

and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. enter Core for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.■ Click OK. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

name the project Area-in progress. click Color Scheme Legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. 37 On the File menu. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. In the next exercise.rvt. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Save. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. In this exercise. and click to place the legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.

under Category. 7 Under Available fields. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Area Type and click Add.3 When the dialog displays.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In this tutorial. floors. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. building elements.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You assign the default wall. curtain systems. At any time. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. If you modify a massing face. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. floor. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. or both. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and floors. and perimeter information. and roofs. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you then need to update the building face. volume. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. After you make building elements. 603 . you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After creating mass floors.

TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.rvt. click Create Mass. under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Massing. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. double-click Level 1. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Floor Plans. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps. click Training Files. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . and cutting geometry. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

13 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . and on the Options Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. enter 25000. select Mass (Opaque). and click OK. enter 1550 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. and click . for Offset. click 18 On the Options Bar. click Extrusion Properties. for Name. click Lines. click the value for Material. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. (Pick Lines). 16 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Materials dialog. (Line). TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. double-click Level 1. under Views (all).

25 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. select Mass (Transparent). for Extrusion End. 26 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. for Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. and click . press TAB to highlight the entire face. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. double-click West.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click OK. TIP If necessary. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Pick a plane. and click OK. under Constraints. click the value for Material. highlight the larger form. 23 In the Materials dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 27500. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). 28 On the Design Bar. enter 25000.

31 Click to select the face. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . (Pick Lines). 37 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click (Arc passing through three points). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and clear Chain. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. and click to select the line start point. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). Next. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.

click Modify. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click the arrow next to the drawing options. and delete the vertical construction line. double-click East. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.TIP If you do not see this option. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. (Line). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 41 On the Edit toolbar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click Edit Top. 39 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click (Move). 45 In the Project Browser.

53 On the View toolbar. 52 On the Design Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click Blend Properties. In this exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. for Material.48 On the Options Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . In the next exercise. (Arc passing through three points). and click OK. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click (Default 3D View). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 50 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 54 Proceed to the next exercise.

place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. m_Massing_Start. select the mass. 4 On the Options bar.rvt. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 2 In the drawing area. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Line). as shown. and select Chain. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click Lines. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all). When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 7 Using the same technique. double-click Level 1. 10 On the Options Bar.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar.

14 Under Constraints. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click Finish Sketch. on the View Control Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. In this exercise. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Extrusion End. snap the corners to the intersections. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 13 On the Design Bar. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. When sketching each extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 0. 15 Click OK. click (Default 3D View). Using Swept Blends | 611 .

m_Massing_Start. under Floor Plans. and click Lines. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. select a point below the mass elements. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. double-click Level 1. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. ■ For the radius. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Sketch 2D Path.

and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 10 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click (Rectangle). verify that <By Sketch> is selected.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click Profile 1. and click Edit. click Finish Path. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the Design Bar.

click Profile 2. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click (Align). and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and press ESC. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Finish Profile. 17 Using the same method.

click <By Category>. 23 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Profile. and click . under Materials and Finishes. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Swept Blend Properties. click Finish Swept Blend. Using Swept Blends | 615 .

You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Finally. you create new family types from a mass family file. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.24 On the Design Bar. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Mass. In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.

enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Height. 5 Click New. and click OK. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . under Other. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. click Training Files. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 6000 mm. 6 For Width. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. In this exercise. 7 Click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. for Height. for Depth. enter 18000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 9 Click OK. and for Name. for Depth. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 46000mm. and click Apply. enter 11000 mm.rfa. for Height. enter 68000 mm. enter 9000 mm. and click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000mm. and click Apply. for Width. 8 For Width. enter 12000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.rfa.

8 In the Type Selector.rfa. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa family files.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. as shown. under Floor Plans. and Triangle. double-click Site. on the View toolbar. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. click Training Files. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. 1 If not already selected. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 6 Open the Box-Training. Semi Barrel Vault. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Place Mass. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. under Views (all).rfa. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Arc Dome.

and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. specify Mass (Opaque). 16 On the Design Bar. 25 In the drawing area. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice.10 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Press CTRL. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. select the 3 boxes. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Place Mass. select the triangle. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . 24 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 14 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. for the Material parameter. 11 Select the box. 20 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and click to place the mass. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. select Rotate after placement. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). enter 90 for Angle.

and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 33 On the View toolbar. and click (Element Properties). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 29 In the Type Selector. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. click (Default 3D View). for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap.rvt file. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you join these mass elements. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. (Join Geometry). Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. In the next exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.

double-click Site. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the Edit toolbar.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click (Mirror). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. under Views (all).

11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 17 Press ESC to see the result. enter SM. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. (Join Geometry). as shown.8 On the Options Bar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). for Axis. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click (Default 3D View).

click Modify. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.In this exercise. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. do not clear the check mark. and select the triangle mass element. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. (If Design Options is already selected. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.rvt. click (Add to Design Option Set). you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. you joined mass elements together. 1 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 2 On the Window menu.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.

and click (Element Properties). 7 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. select Sloped (primary). under Floor Plans. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 14 In the drawing area. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). clear Curved. specify Mass (Transparent). 8 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. for Angle. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. select Rotate after placement. enter 90. click Modify. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . and click OK. double-click Site. 10 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter.

move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. for the Material parameter. under Elevations. click (Add to Design Option Set). select Curved. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 23 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. and watch the status bar. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. clear Sloped. specify Mass (Transparent). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click North. double-click {3D}. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. under Views (all). It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 20 In the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser. While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. and click OK. select the three arc domes. and click (Element Properties). click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . TIP To find the correct shapes. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK twice. under Views (all).

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. and click Close. you can make it the primary option. In this exercise. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. select Curved and. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Option. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. click (Design Options). 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Make Primary. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 34 Close the warning that displays. 35 On the File menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 31 Click the value for Design Option.

click Wall by Face. double-click {3D}. click Training Files. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. you pick massing faces to create walls. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 6 On the Options Bar. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.Brick on CMU. 5 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 2 On the View toolbar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and for Loc Line. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Wall Centerline. click (Pick Faces). under Views (all).

13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 5. 8 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 .

You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. 21 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 In the Project Browser. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 23 Open the 3D view to see the results.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.

double-click {3D}.In this exercise. and click OK. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. click Mass Floors. 4 Click OK. select all levels. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. perimeter. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. and Walls. under Views (all). you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. When you select levels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . volume. and exterior surface area. 8 On the Design Bar. clear Curtain Panels. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. click Modify. 3 On the Model Categories tab.

and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 11 On the Options Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. and click OK. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK. click Mass Floors. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog.14 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . schedules can be created using the mass floors. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. under Category. Floor Volume. under Available fields. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and select Level. and click Add. The Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Mass Floor. press and hold SHIFT. Floor Perimeter. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Floor Area.rvt.In this exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and click OK.

The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Usage. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. select Mass: Family and Type.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter Retail. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. and click OK. for Sort by. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.

After you assign usage. under Scheduled fields (in order). 14 Select Level. 13 With Usage selected. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Mass: Family and Type. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Edit. and click Remove. for Fields. under Other. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Calculate totals. 16 On the Formatting tab. for Filter by. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. select Usage. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and plan views.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the field below. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. and click Properties. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Hotel. click Edit. for Filter. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Grand totals. select Floor Area. 18 On the Filter tab. 19 Click OK twice. under Fields. and click OK. for Field formatting. for Filter. under Other. for Then by. 23 In the Rename View dialog. in the field under Filter by. click Edit. under Other. and click OK. elevation. for Sort by. select Level. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

by level. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.rvt. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you created mass floor schedules.In this exercise. under Views (all). The mass floor schedules list. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. floor perimeter. click Roof by Face.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.400mm. Your model should now look as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .

you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. in the Type Selector. click Create Roof.8 Using the method you just learned. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing. and click OK. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and Walls. In this exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. Curtain Systems. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 13 Using the same method. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. select Curtain Panels. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

rvt. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Create System. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Press CTRL. double-click {3D}. 3 In the Type Selector. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .

11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).9 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. clear Curtain Panels. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). double-click Site. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Floors. and Walls. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 6 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Design Options. for Width. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Next. click Modify. Roofs. enter 30000. Curtain Systems. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.

In the next steps. under Views (all). The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 1.

click (Default 3D View). you want to select the smaller one. 17 Select the roof as shown.TIP To select the curtain wall. click Remake. 14 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. and click Remake.

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . 1 Open the 3D view. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.

and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. under 3D Views. 3 In the Project Browser. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . click All to select all categories. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 9 Select Mass.Massing only. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. right-click {3D}.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.In this exercise. to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial.

652 .

You can also nest groups within other groups. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you not only simplify their placement. In another exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You mirror one instance of the group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. For example. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you also simplify the modification process. place. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. or with those working on a different project. In this tutorial. After you create a model group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Modifying. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. the host group is also updated automatically. and typical office layouts.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. By grouping objects. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. In this exercise. hotel rooms. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. 653 . you add the new model group to a previously created group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Creating. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. When you make changes to a nested group. and modify repetitive units. all instances in the building model are updated.

654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter ZR. click Training Files. expand Views (all). and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click First Floor.

Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group).

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click Create Instance. under Groups. click Modify. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. expand Model.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 12 On the Design Bar. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. right-click Typical Kitchen.

14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group | 661 . all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modifying a Group In this exercise. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. click Save As. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click Save.rvt.

and click to select the door. 8 On the Design Bar. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. select the element. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click member to group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.).). and click to select the wall. press TAB. NOTE To display an excluded element.). 7 Click (Group Member. click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. clear Tag on Placement. 15 On the Options Bar. click Wall. Modifying a Group | 663 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Door. 10 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.127mm. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 In the Type Selector.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping .17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. move the cursor up. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. In edit group mode. click Modify. 23 In the drawing area. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow.

29 On the group editor toolbar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click 28 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups | 665 . click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. created in an earlier lesson. click Modify. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. for Unconnected Height. enter 1000. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. you add the Typical Kitchen group. enter 2134. (Element Properties). which acts as the host.25 On the Design Bar.

rvt.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click (Add to Group). 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser. click Edit Group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 4 On the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group.

Nesting Groups | 667 . select the wall between the folding doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. 7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans.

668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor.rvt. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. you add door tags to a group. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. In the next exercise. and filled regions. such as door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. such as text.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region.

15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 12 Enter Tile. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Text. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Group). 16 In the drawing area. and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. as shown. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click to add an arc leader. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Modify.

Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and click Create Instance. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. under Floor Plans. under Groups. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. expand Detail. click Modify. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables.18 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify.manner that a drawing component can be added. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown.

under Floor Plans. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. select Door Tags. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.

Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Place Detail. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and click OK. therefore.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.

12 On the Design Bar. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. In this case. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. click Desktop. browse to the Desktop. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . for Create new. verify that Project is selected. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. under Groups\Model. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify.rvt. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. accept the default template file. verify that Same as group name is selected. 5 In the New Project dialog. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save. A warning dialog displays. and click OK. and expand Model. 3 For File name. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. expand Groups. and click Open. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save Group. and click Create Instance.

expand Revit Links. click Remove Link. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Bind. and on the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Link. click Training Files. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and the link is removed. and click OK. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. When a group is converted to a link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Use Existing.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 24 In the message dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt file is added as a link to the project.

You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and walkways. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. You add property lines manually.Site 19 In this tutorial. convert the data to a table. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. Using Site Tools In this lesson. 677 . In the final exercises. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. islands. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

In the second part of this exercise. Using the first method. This project file was created using the default metric template. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and double-click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 3 On the Design Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Point. click Training Files. expand Views (all). Creating a Toposurface In this exercise.rvt. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. you create a toposurface using two different methods. and click Site. and open Metric\m_First_Project. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 On the Options Bar. click Toposurface.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference.

15000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Finish Surface. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. enter 1500mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 11 On the Design Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. under Additional Contours. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. and click OK.8 On the Options Bar. click Site Settings. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 12000mm. under Increment. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference.

15 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. 14 On the View toolbar. click the elevation value. click Modify. click to delete it. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). on the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. Before importing the contour data. enter 1000mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 18 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click (Default 3D View). click to view it at various angles. (SteeringWheels). and double-click South. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. modify the level names and elevations.

and press ENTER. select Specify. under Views (all). For Colors. 28 On the Design Bar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog.21 Click the Level 2 text. For Layers. and click OK. 30 On the Edit menu. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. Until it is exploded. select Preserve. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Open. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. rename the level Base Site Elevation. click Yes. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Pin Position. rename the level Basement. click Training Files. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Modify. 23 Click the Level 1 text. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select it.31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Toposurface. and then click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 34 Under Visibility. when the edges highlight. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click the Annotation Categories tab. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. clear Elevations. clear C_INDX. click Visibility/Graphics. When you select the import symbol. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and.

click Finish Surface.rvt. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. name the project Site-in progress. click (SteeringWheels).The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the first method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 39 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). you add property lines using two methods. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . Using the second method. this project file is required in its current state. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 40 On the View toolbar. 42 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Adding Property Lines on page 684. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.

you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Adding Property Lines | 685 .This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. Select and delete the right vertical line. Click Modify. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. and click OK. select Create property lines by sketching. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. do so before continuing. click Property Line. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. under Floor Plans. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration.

click 12 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. to delete them. click Finish Sketch. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. on the Standard toolbar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. add an arc line on the right. select Edit Table. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click OK. and click OK. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click OK. click Property Line. 9 In the warning dialog. select the lines. when they highlight.

the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 15 Starting in Row #1. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click to place the property lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line.14 In the Property Lines dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 19 In the Tags dialog. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 16 Click OK. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This means there is no gap in the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. If the gap is not closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Adding Property Lines | 687 .

32 Proceed to the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines. click the Imported Categories tab. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the next exercise.dwg and click OK. Before adding property line segment tags. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 27 On the Options Bar. click to place it. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. The tags display more prominently in this view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and click Drafting. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. 25 Under Visibility. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 23 On the View menu. In this exercise. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. In the final step.rfa. right-click in the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 22 In the Tags dialog. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click OK. click Training Files. this project file is required in its current state. 30 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save.20 Click Load. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.

select a shade of Brown. under Contour Line Display. 7 Click OK. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. select Working Contour. and click OK.0mm.rvt. select Single Value. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. click New. select Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select Dash dot. Site-in progress. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. enter the name Working Contour. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Line Pattern. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 10 Under Additional Contours. enter 1000. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Object Styles. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Line Color. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. click Site Settings. Under Range Type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Subcategory. Under Subcategory. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 2 On the Settings menu. In the Object Styles dialog.

You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. Working Contour.11 Click OK. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The next exercise requires a new training file. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. The object style subcategory. and islands. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. parking areas. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. parking areas. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . In the next exercise. In this exercise.

Although the exact dimensions are not important. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. try to replicate the location and proportion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 2 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Site. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Subregion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Properties. under Identity Data. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. enter Parking for Name. When you finish the sketch in a later step. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.NOTE In the Metric training file. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. and click to open the Materials dialog.

As you create new subregions. double-click Site. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit Boundary. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. and double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.Tarmacadam. they display within this schedule.9 On the View Control Bar.

click Finish Sketch. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 20 On the View Control Bar.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Lines. double-click Site. Notice that the project area has increased. double-click Topography Schedule. In this training project. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Subregion. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Within each subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 694 | Chapter 19 Site .

24 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the upper-right parking area. under Materials and Finishes. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material.Grass for Name. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK.Grass for Name. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to open the Materials dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Properties. select Site . under Identity Data. 29 On the View Control Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . enter Island .

Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Name the subregion Walkway. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . click Lines.walkway. double-click Site. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. 32 In the Project Browser.31 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. click Subregion. Name each region Island Grass. under Schedules/Quantities.Grass. You must sketch each region separately. 34 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans.

there is still only one toposurface. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 38 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 .

rvt. this project file is required in its current state. When you use the grading tool. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Save. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface on page 698.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 2 Select the toposurface.

Grading the Toposurface | 699 . and click Select and Edit. select Existing for Phase Created. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Graded Region. under Phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Using Phasing on page 761. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Modify. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. click (Element Properties). see the tutorial. select Copy Internal Points.3 On the Options Bar. A warning dialog is displayed.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the Options Bar. click Point. 17 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . only the original toposurface displays. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. specify Existing for Phase. under Phasing. you create a building pad. 24 On the View menu. Only the graded topography displays. you can delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. and click OK. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 23 Select the toposurface.20 On the View toolbar. click to view it at various angles. (SteeringWheels). specify New Construction for Phase. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Phasing. When you add a building pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and delete it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Therefore. this project file is required in its current state. click View Properties. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click Pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . the Pick Walls command is active. 2 On the View Control Bar. If you have an existing building model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE By default. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Lines.

Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. click (Default 3D View). Adding a Building Pad | 705 . Adding Site Components on page 706. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). 8 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. this project file is required in its current state.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 7 On the View Control Bar.

and select the parking space. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 5 On the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.90 deg. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Parking Component.Adding Site Components In this exercise.rvt. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

double-click Site. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser.9 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels). Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. click Site Component.

In the following illustration. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 709 .13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered.

click Tag All Not Tagged.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 5 On the View menu. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. and click OK. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Apply. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. click Apply. click Hidden Line. this project file is required in its current state.

8 On the Options Bar. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Click again to the left to position the leader. outside of the site. to position the shoulder of the leader. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. In the following exercise. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click up and to the left. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . as shown: 10 Using the same method.

11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.■ Clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. 14 On the Design Bar. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify.

under Floor Plans. select Mark. click Close Hidden Windows. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. The parking schedule is displayed. and click OK. 9 On the Window menu. 5 Under Available fields. double-click Site. select Type. 12 In the Site plan. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. click the Fields tab. Site tutorial-in progress. number the first three spaces consecutively. and under Heading. 4 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Fields. 10 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click Add. enter Size. enter Space. click Schedule/Quantities. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. under Views (all). 11 On the Window menu. select Mark. select Parking for Category. If necessary. and click OK. 6 Click the Formatting tab.rvt. select Type. and under Heading. and click Add. click Tile. under Space. 8 Under Fields.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically.

716 .

architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. After the project is shared. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. such as annotations and dimensions. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. doors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. called Worksharing. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. select the desired workset. Using Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. All other team members can view this workset. floors. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you specify an active workset. use Element Borrowing. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. and so on. you can select which worksets are open or closed. such as walls. Working in a shared project In a shared project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . they cannot make changes to it. stairs. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. To make a workset editable. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. however. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. go to the Worksets dialog.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. you must first enable Worksharing. Elements specific to a view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. and click Editable. The first time you activate worksets within a project. In this tutorial. When you are working on a shared project. A workset is a collection of building elements. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you.

greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. When setting up Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Experience has shown that. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. for a typical project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team.dialog. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. and View worksets. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. not including the Project Standards. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In the next exercise. In most projects. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In a multi-story structure. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Instead. After learning the fundamentals. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. such as a tenant interior. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Shared Levels and Grids. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets.

When you create a new workset. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Regardless of the default setting. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing.Team member roles Typically. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. When creating the new worksets. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. For example. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. if a workset named Interior was created. On this tab. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. designers work in teams. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. As new members create worksets for their own use. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared.

you can select which workset is active. When finished or at regular intervals. you should then save to your local file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. however. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Generally. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. your changes propagate to the entire team. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This makes them available to other team members. However. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save to the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. your changes are saved. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Therefore. This is called “Selective Open. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. When you save locally (to your local file). you make that workset editable by you. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. On the Options Bar. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. When you save to the central file. the file is saved as the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. within the local file. proceeds as usual.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. After saving to the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. As you work. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment.

Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. In this instance. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. and make that workset editable. To do this. save to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Alternatively. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. and then save the local file. you work no differently then you would in the office. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. using VPN. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this situation. reload the latest changes from the central file. In this conceptual exercise. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. make any required worksets editable. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. if you know who checked out the required workset. for instance. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. When working remotely. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. In the next exercise.

When you enable worksharing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. and notice all are editable by you. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Training Files. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Worksets. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.rvt. Your username displays as the present owner. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and open Common\c_Worksets. The Worksets dialog displays. under Show. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Worksets dialog.

click OK. currently named Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and Views. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 13 In the Rename dialog. Only User-Created worksets should display. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. clear Visible by default in all views. 17 On the Options Bar. You do. another is assigned the interior layout. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 8 Click OK. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. imagine four users including yourself. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. expand Floor Plans. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. In this simple training project. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. select Workset1. click . click New. 11 In the Worksets dialog. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. clear Families. 12 Click Rename. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. When you initially activate Worksharing. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. In this training file. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. it is better to make them visible by default. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. expand Views (all). The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. ■ 5 Under Show. and double-click Level 1. under Identity Data. 9 Click New. For example. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 16 In the drawing area. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this case. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. you can rename the default workset. Therefore. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. and click OK. For training purposes. Project Standards. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. however. type the name Exterior Shell.

under Identity Data. 24 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select Interior Layout for Workset. and walls. click Visibility/Graphics. including the interior doors. select Interior Layout for Workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK. 26 On the View menu. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. stairs.19 Click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and click OK.

select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Visibility/Graphics. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Non Editable. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Now that you have created the central file. 39 Click Save. click Save As. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. 32 Select Interior Layout. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. click . Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 38 In the Save As dialog. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 On the View menu. If any interior elements remain. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click Close. double-click Level 2. click the Worksets tab. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 43 Click OK. under Identity Data. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. under Views (all). This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 34 In the drawing area. click Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. under Floor Plans. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. and click OK. 44 On the File menu. 33 In the Project Browser.

you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and click OK. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and select Yes for Editable. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and select Specify. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 4 Click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and double-click Level 1. Before working on the model. select the central file. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 12 Click OK. In addition. please do so before continuing. click Open. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Worksets. click Options. and click Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. click Save As. 7 In the Save As dialog. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Next. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In this case. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout for Name. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the Window menu. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . check out worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. expand Views (all). 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select Interior Layout. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. you create your local file.

Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 21 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click Modify. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. and click OK. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. In this case. notice the Editable Only option. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. If this is selected. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Verify that it is cleared. you can still edit this wall. click . Because this element is not owned by another user. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 24 Click OK. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. however. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . 20 Under Constraints. 23 On the File menu. 18 On the Options Bar. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. under Identity Data. On the Options Bar. 22 Click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. If it was owned by another user.

33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Door. click Modify. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.126mm Partition (2-hr). add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. select Basic Wall: Interior . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Delete the door. 29 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. 31 On the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 34 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important.

leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and reload the latest changes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. displays the workset as well as the element type. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Throughout the process. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. When working in your local file. you created your local file. Borrowed Elements is selected. and save locally immediately afterward. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. you should relinquish all worksets. add two door openings into the rooms you created. By default. which matches the information in the Status Bar. In this exercise. In addition. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . you should perform regular saves. checked out worksets. a tooltip. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. two users access the central file through a network connection. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. please do so before continuing. If you have not yet completed these exercises. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. For training purposes. save to central. it is recommended. You modified the building model. click Save to Central. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. make elements editable. each user must check out worksets. In this particular case. At the end of a work session. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Whenever you save.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and select Specify. This file is for your use only. 15 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu. and select Yes for Editable. skip the following section. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. select the central file. return to the Settings dialog. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Options.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. For training purposes. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 4 Click the General Tab and. consider that person to be User 1. click Save As. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. click Worksets. and click OK. and click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. In addition. and reset the Username to your computer login name. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Throughout the remainder of this exercise. enter User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. specifically sequenced. 7 In the Open dialog. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 Click Open. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. click Options. under Username. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select all the User-Created worksets. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click Save. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. You now have a local copy of the project. one user has already created a local file. 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Save As dialog.rvt. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Open. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. This is a system setting. In the following section of this exercise.

If you only have one workset checked out. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Floor Plans. 17 Click OK. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. modify the building model. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . click Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 19 On the File menu. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Check out worksets. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. open it now. If it is not open. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 27 On the File menu. 23 Click OK. and select Yes for Editable. click Save to Central. it becomes the active workset. and double-click Level 1. select the lower exterior wall.” 29 Click OK. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans.You are now the owner of that workset. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.

under Floor Plans. click Worksets. select Yes for Editable. and click OK. and click OK.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Before adding any furniture. 41 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 46 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. you should create a furniture plan view. 37 On the File menu. 44 In the Project Browser. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.” 39 Click OK. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click Rename. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide.” 35 Click OK. Click Yes. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Save to Central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 33 On the File menu. 42 Select Furniture Layout. under Floor Plans. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. However. under Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. right-click Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 45 In the Rename View dialog. When you save to central. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Modify. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE System families. select Project Standards. click Save to Central. and click inside any room. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 48 In the Type Selector. 62 On the File menu. 66 On the File menu. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 63 In the Worksets dialog.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Worksets. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. and click OK. 49 On the Design Bar. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . and click OK. Therefore. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 65 Click OK. rather than Families. 50 On the View menu.” 55 Click OK.200mm. choose any desk. click Save to Central. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. and click Element Properties. click Edit/New. such as Wall Types. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Reload Latest. 53 On the File menu. 60 In the Rename dialog. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 61 Click OK 2 times. enter Exterior Wall . 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. under Show. are placed under Project Standards. click Component.

leave this file open in its current state. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Checking out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. There are specific instructions for each user. Each user checked out worksets. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and published their changes back to the central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you need to set up your central and local files. and these problems are rectified. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. throughout this training. and click OK. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. As each of you work. click Training Files. In subsequent steps. and save 69 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. finished the previous workset exercises.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise.rvt. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. select Save to Central. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). modified the building model. 70 On the File menu. select the following. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Options. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. click Save As. select Reload Latest. In the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. you save the training file as a central file. and still have your local files open. Each user must have network access to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).

and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 12 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. 18 In the Save As dialog. 17 On the File menu. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. In addition. 5 Click Save. select the central file. and click OK. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. On the Settings menu. 15 Click Open. and click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. select Make this a Central File after save. and select Specify. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 8 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 6 On the File menu. click Save As.4 In the File Save Options dialog. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Next. click Save As. and click Save. return to the Settings dialog. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. This is a system setting. click Options. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 In the Open dialog. The central file should still be open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This is the local file for User 1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK. Set the Username to User 2.

you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the Interior Layout workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You are now the owner of that workset. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select Exterior Shell. After you submit the request. At this point. select them. and select Yes for Editable. and select Yes for Editable. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select Interior Layout. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and then click OK. 24 Under Active Workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. double-click Level 1. click Worksets. Afterwards. and then click OK. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and click Editing Requests. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 27 Under Active Workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 29 On the Options Bar. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Floor Plans. 30 On the left exterior wall. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click Open. if any User-Created worksets are not open. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. select the second window from the top. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.

40 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and close 39 On the File menu. to Local. select Save to Central. click Close. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 38 Click OK. 35 Click Grant. In this multi-user exercise. click Check Now. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. In this case. select the following.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and notice the window is in the new location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . you requested permission to edit the element. and the other user granted it. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 36 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2.

738 .

and each option set can have multiple schemes. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In this tutorial. In addition. At any time in the design process. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can have multiple sets of design options. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client has asked you to create various options. For example. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In this particular case. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). Using design options. 739 . you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.

the only available command is to create a new option set. With the second option. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. under Option Set.rvt. each is constructed for interchangeability. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. After you create a design option. you set up multiple design option sets. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. make your final design decision. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.In the first exercise in this lesson. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. each with multiple design options. you can edit it. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. 2 In the Design Options dialog. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click New. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. therefore. In the second exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Training Files. you design each of the structural options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. click Edit Selected. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. TIP In this exercise.

Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 5 On the View menu. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. TIP To center the middle column.4 In the Project Browser. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 9 On the Design Bar. In this case. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Column. By selecting Multiple. click Modify. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . expand Floor Plans. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. or add a dimension string between the columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 7 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and the third column centered between the two. In the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. add three columns.

and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click . When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. Because of the size of the columns. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 Zoom out and.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . double-click TOP OF CORE. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Modify. In it. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. click Beam. you add the beams that span the columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. select Round Bar : 50mm. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The first click specifies the beam start point. under Floor Plans. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Use the following illustration as a guide. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Next. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. and click the center point. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. select: ■ ■ ■ . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. There should now be two roofing design options.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. 41 Under Option Set. enter Brackets for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. click New. and click OK. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click Rename. click Rename. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 45 Under Roofing. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 37 Select Option 2 and. under Option. 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. 43 In the Rename dialog. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click New. under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Roofing for New. name the option Louvers. 46 Under Option. click Rename. under Option Set. enter Structure for New. under Option. and click OK. and click OK. under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

it will resemble the following illustration. 53 In the Project Browser. 48 Under Option. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Now Editing. under Floor Plans. 50 In the Design Options dialog. you create the second design option. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 52 Click Close. name the option Sunscreen. click Rename. and click OK. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Beam. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. select Edit Selected. under Structure. 51 Under Edit. select Option 2. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. When finished.47 Under Roofing. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.

59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 58 On the Tools menu. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . click Align. select M_Roof Beam. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component.

The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 61 On the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and.

NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. you need this file in its current state. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click . click Finish Editing. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. name the file. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 70 On the File menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. and click Save.rvt. which is visible by default. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 67 On the Tools menu. 66 On the View toolbar. click Save As. 69 Click Close.

3 In the Design Options dialog. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. The second roofing system. the other for beams. you set up multiple design option sets. 10 Referring to the following illustration. open it now. 5 Click Close. each with multiple design options to pick from. In the next exercise. 2 On the Tools menu. expand Floor Plans. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open.In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The first option. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 4 Under Edit. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Edit Selected. Sunscreen. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 8 In the Type Selector. a Louver system. With the second option. If you need to add dimensions. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. under Roofing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Under Now Editing. select Louvers (primary). you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. you design each of the roofing options. expand Views (all). delete them after the rafter is in place. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. do so now. click Component. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 15 On the Edit menu. click Array. and click OK.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. under Other. click . The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Modify. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 11750 mm for Length. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 13 On the Options Bar.

752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990.

enter 5475 mm for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 27 For the array starting point. 22 On the Design Bar.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 20 In the Type Selector. and select the louver you just placed. Select Constrain. click the Edit menu. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click Modify. under Other. Select 2nd for Move To. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 25 With the louver still selected. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 34 for Number. click Component. and click Array.

when the listening dimension displays. enter 300. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter. click . 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar.

expand Elevations. In this case. 34 In the Project Browser. under Roofing. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Edit Selected. 39 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and then click Close. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 40 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Tools menu. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. under Edit. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. select Sunscreen. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 33 Under Editing. Click OK. and click OK. and double-click West. click Finish Editing. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof.The louver roof system is complete. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Lines. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . Therefore. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.

NOTE As you sketch the arcs. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. then you can modify it through the dimension. The arcs should connect. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. click Finish Sketch. click Trim/Extend.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints. You will fix this in a later step. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Select the right arc. click Properties. and the third point defines the arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. click . 48 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 49 On the View toolbar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. The first two points define the ends of the line. 46 On the Tools menu. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Select the top of the left column. then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the top of the next column on the right.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and click Rename. The first option. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. you select a design. under Edit. Managing Design Options In this exercise. make it part of the building model. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In this exercise. and delete the discarded design options. Sunscreen. and then click Close. tertiary. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. a Louver system. do so now. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. under Views (all). The second roofing system. click Save.The louver roof system is complete. 50 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. and click OK. and click Duplicate. 51 In the Design Options dialog. After exploring the combinations. enter Primary Option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Finish Editing. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. expand 3D Views. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Managing Design Options | 757 . NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. secondary. and last options. you designed each of the roofing options. 52 On the File menu. 4 In the Project Browser.

13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. and click OK. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Secondary Option. and click Rename. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible.5 Right-click each of the copies. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser.

all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Last Option. 19 On the View menu. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. In this case. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design.14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. At this point. In your design options. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. 15 On the View menu. Managing Design Options | 759 . 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.

In this exercise. 30 Under Option Set. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 31 In the alert dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you selected a design. under Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 26 Under Option Set. click Yes. select Beam. and deleted the discarded design options. click Save. click Accept Primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 24 Under Option. double-click Primary Option. This was the client choice for structural. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. 25 Select Structure. 29 Select Roofing. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Delete. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Because the client has selected the design option. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. click Delete to remove the views that used options. since you no longer need them. The set is deleted. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 27 In the alert dialog.22 On the Tools menu. click Yes. 35 On the File menu. the beam option becomes part of the model. 23 In the Design Options dialog. select Make Primary. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. made it part of the building model. click Close.

This changes room definition and total building model area.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. You create new phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. 761 . you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. For the client. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. complete with schedules. demolish existing construction.

and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. 7 Click Cancel.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. If you wish to do so. define the units. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. under Phasing. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. regardless of phase. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click Project Units. under Phasing. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 4 Click Cancel. go to the Settings menu. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. are visible in this view.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. click (Element Properties). You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. and open Common\c_Phasing. This means that all building model elements. During the demolition and renovation process. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In the Element Properties dialog. you do not need to change the project units to metric. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. As you add new elements to the building model. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. When you create a new project. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. expand Views (all).

11 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area.Demo. enter Level 1 . TIP If this were a multi-story building. select Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Because this is a renovation project. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 14 On the Design Bar. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click OK. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. for Phase Created. including the door tags. all of the building model elements. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser.Existing. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click Rename.Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. After you create the views. 19 In the Project Browser. After you release the mouse button. 17 Click No. click (Filter Selection). enter Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. are highlighted in red. and click Rename. clear Door Tags. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 On the Options Bar.Existing. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Phasing Your Model | 763 . 10 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. Because this is a phase-specific view. click . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. under Phasing. click Modify. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 . draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.

Phase status is time-dependent. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. to which all the building model elements belong. and Temporary. however. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. On a logical time line. for Phase. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Next. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. you modify these settings. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. select Overridden. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 28 Under Filter Name. 24 In the Project Browser. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 29 For Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Later in this exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. Because of this time relationship. and click OK. select Existing. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. In this case. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. click the Phase Filters tab. under Phasing.Existing.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. You may need to zoom in to see this. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Existing. new construction occurs after existing construction. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. There are five default phase filters. enter Composite Plan.Demo. Demolished. 27 Click New. under New. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 .

select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. under Cut ➤ Lines. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. you begin demolition. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Using the same method. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 35 Click OK twice. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Next. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select a lighter blue. under Floor Plans. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. The cursor is displayed as a hammer.Existing. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 42 In the Project Browser.Demo. double-click Level 1 . click the value for Color. or you can use the demolish tool. 32 In the Demolished row. under Floor Plans. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select Demolished. select red. double-click Level 1 . 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. When you demolish the host. 39 In the Phasing dialog. click (Demolish). its display changes to a red dashed line. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select the line style. click OK.31 Under Phase Status. As you click each wall. you demolish all elements hosted by it. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Phasing Your Model | 765 .

select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).Existing. select Show Previous + New. 53 Open Level 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. 47 In the Type Selector. add a long horizontal wall. under Phasing. 50 In the Type Selector. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 51 Add a door leading into each room. for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior .Demo. 49 On the Design Bar. click Door. click Wall. 52 Open Level 1 .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK.

61 On the View Control Bar. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. new is shown in blue.Demo. 59 Open Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. click (Default 3D View). 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 60 On the View toolbar. right-click Level 1 . The renovated building model plan is displayed. 57 In the Project Browser.New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and existing shows as half-tone. 62 If necessary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. regardless of phase. Phasing Your Model | 767 . which are displayed as red.New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. All elements are displayed in this view.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed.

sizes. therefore. 3 Open Level 1 . Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. In this exercise. go to the Settings menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can see the new walls added to the building model. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In this view.rvt. 63 Close the file. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. click Project Units. In the next exercise. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. demolition. click Training Files. As the renovation process continues. If you wish to save this file. you can do so at this time. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view.New. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Notice that this view is the original building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this view. If you wish to do so. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.Demo. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. the rooms change in both definition and size. You can also see that the room quantities. and double-click Level 1 . you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. expand Views (all). and new construction.Existing. define the units. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 2 Open Level 1 . and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser.

Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click Room Tag. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room.New. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. yet they have different room numbers. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and maximize the view. In the Phasing dialog.Demo. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room. click in each room as you move to the right. 10 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Use the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.Existing. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 13 Open Level 1 . 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

Existing. 16 In the Project Browser. click Tile. 20 Close the file. In this exercise. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. View phase-specific room schedules. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.New Construction. The two schedule views tile. 19 On the Window menu. In addition. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Close Hidden Windows. 17 On the Window menu. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. In this case. and double-click Room Schedule . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 18 Open Room Schedule .

and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site. 771 . In the final lesson.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. In these situations. This maximizes efficiency. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. You position the building models on the site plan. performance. modify their visibility.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . modify their visibility. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. One building model is a condominium. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. and the other is a townhouse. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You link two building models to the project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You position the building models on the site.

Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 2 On the File menu.rvt. however. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. c_Townhouse. Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Open. this option will place the link at a predefined location. this system is not exposed to the user. Otherwise. Manual . in the Model Linking folder that you created. you can do so. and save the file there. Select c_Site. click Close.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. and click OK. and click Properties. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . click Open. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. ■ ■ Manual . This option is grayed out. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. select the three files. c_Condo_Complex. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. right-click. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. with write permission. All three files now reside. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. click Save As.■ Auto . ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . RELATED See the lesson. 5 On the File menu. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 4 On the File menu. Click Open. and open Common\c_Site. 8 Clear Read-only.

click Project Units. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and double-click Level 1. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 13 Click Open. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. For Positioning. 11 On the File menu. select Auto . you can go to the Settings menu.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines. and make your changes. expand Floor Plans. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you wish to do so. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).

similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 17 For the move endpoint. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 16 For the move start point. click (Move). The Move command requires two clicks. The second click specifies the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. After you select it.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . The linked model moves as one object.

18 On the View menu. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. and select c_Townhouse. select Auto . For Positioning. 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin.

click (Rotate). when the vertical line displays. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. In this case. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 .The townhouse building model displays above the site model. To rotate an object.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

click (Copy). The first click specifies the start point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. click (Default 3D View). 37 On the View toolbar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. under Identity data. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. enter Townhouse A. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . use the Move command to make any adjustments. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 32 On the Edit menu. for Name. click . click Rotate. 34 On the Options Bar.

and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. do so before continuing. After linking the files. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you modify the elevation of the townhouses. When you originally linked the files. they were placed too low within the site topography. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site.38 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click and hold Orbit. In the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click Save. In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view.

This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. and double-click South. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and click to select the line. and then select the plane that you want to align. When using the Align command. In this case. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click to select it. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 7 On the Tools toolbar. To do this. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. expand Elevations. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. In the steps that follow. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click the Revit Links tab. when it highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left.rvt. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. you first select the plane you want to align to. under Views (all). If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. click (Align).

click and hold Orbit. This would over-constrain the model. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click Save. (SteeringWheels). 9 In the Project Browser. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 12 On the View toolbar. click 13 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . under Elevations. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. double-click North. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 15 On the File menu.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 9 Under Visibility. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. scroll down and clear Levels. 8 For Annotation Categories. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. When you link a file. double-click South. click Visibility/Graphics. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Elevations. If the Basics page is set to Custom. As you can see.rvt. you can independently control the visibility settings. expand c_Townhouse. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. click By Host View. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. click Custom. 10 Click OK. and the halftone settings for each linked project. click OK.rvt. do so before continuing. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. In this exercise. By linked view. click the Revit Links tab. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. detail level. display settings. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Visibility. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. or Custom. 2 On the View menu. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. select <Custom>.

With linked files. under Floor Plans. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. click the Revit Links tab. 24 Click OK. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. or fine. on the Basics tab. and then set the detail level to coarse. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 23 In the Model categories list. click By Host View. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. In this case.rvt. expand c_Townhouse. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 20 For c_Townhouse. under Display Settings. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. By selecting custom under Model Categories. select <Custom>. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. Using the Custom option. You can click the value for Detail Level. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. By default.rvt. select Custom. click the Revit Links tab. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. double-click Level 1. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . medium.rvt.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 14 On the View menu. no detail level changes are required. 16 Under Visibility.

With the Show All filter applied. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. demolished. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In most cases. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. However. 29 Click OK. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. By default. click Save. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 31 On the File menu. In this case. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. this is preferable. all new. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. on a sloped site for instance. In this exercise. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. All other components are grayed out. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. click OK. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. you manage the linked files. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. phase. select c_Townhouse. In the next exercise. existing. under Visibility. you need this project file open and in this view.rvt. there are situations. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. 26 Under Display Settings. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. and phase filter of a specific link. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. In this case.

select c_Condo_Complex. In general. click Manage Links. 5 Click Unload. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Locations Not Saved. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Notice the Loaded. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. the link is maintained. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 7 Click OK. and Saved Path fields are read only. 6 At the confirmation prompt. 4 Under Linked File. do so before continuing. 3 Under Path Type. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. click Yes. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. They supply information regarding the links. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. You learn more about this in the next lesson. click the Revit tab. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The default path type is Relative. In a shared coordinate environment. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.

TIP In the Manage Links dialog. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. However. 9 On the File menu. and select Specify. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.rvt. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. When you initially place the link. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases. To do this. click Save As. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. If you choose not to open that workset. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. expand Revit Links. In general. right-click c_Condo_Complex. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. click the arrow next to the Open button. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Reload. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the link is not loaded.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you are establishing a shared origin point. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. leave the project file open in its current view. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In this exercise. When you share coordinates between projects. name the file Site_Project. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. and save it as an RVT file. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. and the resulting project files. In the next lesson. The host file consists primarily of site components. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. do so before continuing. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.10 In the Save As dialog. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In essence.

790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you have not completed the lesson. As indicated in the Status Bar.coordinates are used. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. When you are working in the host project. click Open. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click the Condo Complex. In this case. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. open it before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson.rvt and click Open. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. and the resulting project files. Linking Building Models on page 772. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 2 On the Tools menu. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. do so before continuing. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. 3 In the drawing area. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. If you have closed the project.

even though both models originate from one linked file. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. and click OK. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. click to select it. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. do so before continuing. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. If you have not completed the exercise. These three locations can be named Lot A. you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. select Location 1. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. However. and Lot C. Lot B. On the Status Bar.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. this location is not saved outside of the host project. when the edges highlight. it is placed at a specific location. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. In this exercise. but can have multiple additional locations. 5 On the Design Bar. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 .

12 On the Options Bar. click Reconcile. . click Rename. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Change. click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. and click OK. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Record the current position as a location. select Move instance to. click Not Shared for Shared Location. When constraining a link to a location. 4 Under Value. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. under Instance Parameters.2 On the Options Bar. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This is a one-time operation. and click OK. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. enter Lot A for New. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 9 In the Select Location dialog. In the Choose Location dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared.

notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected.Notice the OK button is not active. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. you cannot redefine its location. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. To explicitly save a location. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. or cancel the action. When you relocate a project. 19 In the Select Location dialog. When you create a location. Notice the OK button is still not active. click OK. select Save. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. and then select the townhouse project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. The second click specifies the move endpoint. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. Record current position as. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. enter Lot B for Name. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 16 Click Change. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. a warning displays. This is a two-click process. When you release the mouse button. The first click specifies the move start point. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. By relocating a project. ignore the warning. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. make sure Lot B is selected. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. Save locations 21 On the File menu. and click OK. the active location position is moved. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. and click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click the Revit tab. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. select the second option. 26 Click OK. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click Manage Links. 23 Click Save Locations. 30 On the Tools menu. 25 In the Manage Links dialog.

33 On the Edit menu. 34 On the File menu. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. In this exercise. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. you work in one of the linked projects. click Close. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Save. 36 On the File menu. NOTE In the following exercise. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and click OK. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Because this building model only has one named location. In this exercise. When opening the linked file.rvt file. do so before continuing. select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. The current active location is Lot A. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. For Positioning.By Shared Coordinates. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host.rvt file. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. double-click 1st Floor. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. if other models were linked into the same host. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the File menu. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Click Open. under Floor Plans. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Select c_Condo_Complex. Also. click Open. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . it is placed automatically within the host project. In addition. If you have not completed the exercises.

Notice that Lot A is the current active location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. select True North for Orientation. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. and click OK. orient a view to true north.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. do so before continuing. and click Make Current. In the host file. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In this exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Manage Place and Locations. you can select Lot C if necessary. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you create a new location. enter Lot C. 3 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 7 Click OK. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. under Graphics. click View Properties. 6 Select Lot B. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. click Manage Place and Locations. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you manage the shared locations. click OK. click Duplicate. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise.

You can save the file if you wish. If you have not completed the exercise. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. click Open. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. click Close. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. On the Options Bar. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. In this exercise. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 10 On the File menu.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. select Doors. and click Add. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. under Category. select Count. click Schedule/Quantities.

Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. select Family and Type for Sort by. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. 14 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . In this exercise. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type.8 Click OK. right-click Door Schedule. 13 On the File menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You have completed this tutorial. click Save. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 12 Select Grand totals. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. clear Itemize every instance. click Close. under Other.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and click OK. click Browse. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. which is independent of the project settings. click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. under Template file. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. notification preferences. 803 . select Invert background color. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you create an office template. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you modify the system environment. In the first lesson. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 3 In the Options dialog. In the second lesson. selection default options. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. Finally. 11 Under Colors. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. 10 In the Options dialog. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. and your username when using worksets. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the New Project dialog. click the value for Selection color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. and set it as your default template.rte.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 4 Under Colors. These settings control the graphics. journal cleanup options.

24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click the General tab. click the Graphics tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 15 Click OK. 22 When prompted to save changes. click No. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 26 In the Options dialog. 14 Under Notifications. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. select One hour. select red. and select the wall. click Modify. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. For Selection color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. For Tooltip assistance. click Modify. click Wall. and open Metric\m_Settings. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select None.12 In the Color dialog. and click OK. When an error occurs. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. the elements causing the error display using this color.rvt. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. select yellow. However. clear Invert background color. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 8 Click Cancel. family template files. 5 Under Default path for user files. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Your login name displays by default. click Browse. 7 In the Options dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Under Username. centralized. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. select your preferred Save reminder interval. click Browse. notice the list of library names. such as in a large. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 2 In the Options dialog. For Tooltip assistance. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Places. select the folder to save your files to by default. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. you can start a new project with that template. and family libraries. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. click Browse. 10 In the Places dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. under Default path for family template files. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. including your default project template. 4 Click Cancel. Under Journal File Cleanup. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. and click Open. If prompted. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. do not save the changes. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. click the File Locations tab. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 3 Under Default template file. select Normal. you specify default file locations. and click Browse to select a template. These files are used in the software support process. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. However. Specifying File Locations on page 805.27 Click the General tab. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. TIP To view a template.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. In the following illustration. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and you can create new libraries. and click the icon side of the field. and change the name to My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.library names and path. When you are opening. 11 In the Places dialog. or families. Save. click (Add Value). and select it as the library path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . saving. under Libraries. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and click Open. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Load. and Import dialogs.

click the Spelling tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path is determined during installation. click My Library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 22 Click Places. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. specify the new location here. 23 Select My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. such as bump maps. click Edit. click Edit. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 Under Settings. If you want to relocate this path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . and click OK twice. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and Import dialogs. custom color files. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and decal image files. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click the My Library icon. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 15 Under Library Name. Load. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you work in a large office. 9 In the text editor. Save. 28 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths.

click Edit. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 21 In the text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Browse. 23 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. If prompted. 12 On the Standard toolbar. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.11 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. you modify snap settings. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You can turn snap settings on and off. 2 In the New Project dialog. do not save the changes. In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Modify. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click default template. 14 Click in the drawing area. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. under Template file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click the Spelling tab.rte. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. 22 In the text editor. you modify snap increments. 20 Under Personal dictionary. work with snapping turned off. 18 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. click OK. 19 Under Settings. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.

You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If it does not. click Wall. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings.6 Under Dimension Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter SM. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 10 On the Options Bar. For example. and enter 500 . 7 Under Object Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. clear Chain. click OK. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . If you do not have a wheel button..

Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and delete the value 500 . and the wall edges. the midpoint. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 18 Enter SM. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and move the cursor to the right. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 24 Click OK. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and do not save the file. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click Modify. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. This is the increment that you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall.. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and click Wall.

Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. In the steps that follow. you render a region to observe the changes. Using these options. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. lines. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor.rvt. click Training Files. Finally. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. fill patterns. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. save the project file with a unique name. annotations. When you apply a material to an element. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . and object styles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. You create and modify materials. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. and open Metric\m_Settings. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.

and texture of the material. and click OK. enter Masonry . and select Masonry . In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. for Class. These details will display in rendered images. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. However. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. scale. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. In the next exercise. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. When a model element is loaded into a project.Stone.Fieldstone. Masonry .Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.Fieldstone. The properties describe the color. 6 Click Replace. In the steps that follow. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . and double-click 02 Entry Level. this material provides a starting point for the new material. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. When you change properties of a render appearance. The Render Appearance Library is a local. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 3 Click (Duplicate). 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 2 Scroll down the materials list.Fieldstone material. read-only library for render appearances. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. select Stone. 11 Click OK. 9 Click Apply. 10 Click the Graphics tab. and click (Element Properties). and click OK.

click Edit/New. and click OK. . 22 Select the left exterior wall. 17 For Structure. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select the rear exterior wall. 24 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 23 While pressing CTRL.14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 25 On the View toolbar.Fieldstone. Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit.Brick. 18 For Finish 1. click in the Material field. 16 Enter the new wall name. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . and click OK. click This is the material that you created. 15 Click Duplicate.Fieldstone. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . select Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 26 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 21 Click OK three times.

Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. The rendering process begins. When finished. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. In the following exercise.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 29 In the 3D view. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. under Quality. select Low or Medium. for Setting. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. click Render. select the render region (a red rectangle). 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Region. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. click Rendering Dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and click Rendering. 28 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. right-click the Design Bar.

in the Rendering dialog. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. and clear Region. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. click Show the model. click Show the model. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 7 Under Custom. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click West. 5 Click New. Zoom into the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Drafting pattern density is fixed. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Import. select Custom. m_Settings-in progress. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. choose Model. expand Elevations. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Then click Render again. 3 Under Pattern Type.rvt. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall.rvt. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. such as steel.

20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.56. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Edit. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click in the Material field. click to select a fill pattern. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. and click OK. select Model.Fieldstone. and click OK. 10 For Name. click . 22 Click OK three times. click OK. 21 In the Materials dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 11 Click OK.Fieldstone material. enter . 17 On the right side of the Materials field. for Finish 1. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Materials dialog. (Element Properties). enter Fieldstone. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 9 Under Custom. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 23 On the Design Bar. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click Edit/New. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click 15 For Structure. 13 On the Options Bar. select fldstn. under Pattern Type. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog.pat. and for Import scale.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). adjust your zoom settings as needed. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you.rvt. For example. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Settings-in progress. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. click (Default 3D View).25 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you can set the window frame material to By Category. 2 On the keyboard. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. TIP If the pattern does not display. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. and double-click 3 Windows. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types.

16 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click By Category. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Select the arched window. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click By Category (located under the materials list). 14 In the Materials dialog. click (Element Properties). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. and click 15 Click OK twice. and click . click Edit/New. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. for Trim Exterior Material. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. under Materials and Finishes. . under Materials and Finishes. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column.3 On the View Control Bar.

19 For Trim. or keywords include the word red. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 29 In the Materials dialog. (Duplicate). select Trim. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 25 In the search field. click OK. click in the Material column. When you render a 3D view. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. for Class. and click OK. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and select Trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. enter Trim . and click 20 In the Materials dialog. descriptions.red paint. . click OK. 23 Click Replace. 28 Under Shading. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. and click OK. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. type red. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. expand Windows. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. for Name. select Paint. 30 In the Object Styles dialog.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .31 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Name. 11 For Line Pattern. select Roofs.rvt. under Category. select Roof Line. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Now that you have created a line pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. (Default 3D view). m_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click New. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. is open with the 3D view active. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter Roof Line.rvt. 10 For Line Color. 7 On the View Control Bar. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Red. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. m_Settings-in progress.

Notice that the line color displays in this view. but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views. double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view.12 Click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 .

under Category. For Color. sections. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. double-click 03 Roof. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 18 For Line Color.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. click Override. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 19 For Line Pattern. select Roof Line. elevations. For Pattern. 20 Click OK. select 5. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Solid. select Blue. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. under Floor Plans. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. Plans. select Roofs. select Black. 15 In the Project Browser. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Visibility. select Roofs.

For Line Color. click Lines. under Floor Plans. select Zoning Setback. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 2. select Double dash. select Level: 02 Entry Level. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 29 For Name. For Line Pattern. specify the following: ■ For Plane.25 Click OK twice. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. and click OK. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. under Modify Subcategories. (Line). 30 For the Zoning Setback category. This places the line above the topography. 34 On the Options Bar. select Red. 31 Click OK. enter Zoning Setback. Click Click (Draw). click New. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . double-click Site. 33 In the Type Selector.

42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Expand Site. 43 Click OK. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 40 In the Project Browser. and clear Property Lines. 38 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. expand Lines. 39 Click OK. 44 On the View toolbar. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click 02 Entry Level. NOTE If Site is not selected. Modifying Annotations on page 825. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 36 On the View toolbar. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. click (Default 3D View). select it. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines.

7 Click OK twice.Modifying Annotations In this exercise.rvt. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Modifying Annotations | 825 . click the default value.Imperial. select Linear . for Units Format. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click Modify. and then click outside the second wall. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. m_Settings-in progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.Imperial and click OK. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 5 Under Text.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click another wall. under Floor Plans. click Dimension. You have created a new dimension style. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Feet and fractional inches. (Undo). 4 Enter the name Linear . m_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To place a dimension. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Units. double-click 02 Entry Level. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Duplicate. click one wall. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.

This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click Tag ➤ By Category. scroll down to Windows. 19 Click Load. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Tags dialog.14 On the Options Bar. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 16 Click Cancel. 28 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. In the preview image. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag .Number. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the bottom window. 27 On the west wall. Leave M_Window Tag . click Training Files. select the 3 window tags. notice that the label displays 1i. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Then press Delete. click M_Window Tag . In the steps that follow. under Category. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number as the assigned tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.rfa. 18 In the Tags dialog. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 24 While pressing CTRL. click (Element Properties). 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged.Number. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 23 Click OK.Number is now the assigned tag. 26 On the Options Bar.

31 On the Design Bar. click the default value. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. select Faces. Unless overridden. Specifying Units of Measurement. Click OK. 32 On the View toolbar. select Openings. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. select To the nearest 100.Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements. Unless overridden. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. dimension values display using this setting.Under Category. In the first section. Specifying Units of Measurement. select 0 decimal places. and click OK. and click OK. for Rounding. In the second section. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. (Default 3D View). click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Settings-in progress. Specifying Units of Measurement. For Unit symbol. 8 Under Walls. the other displays the instance value. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Modify. Temporary Dimensions. for Length. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. you modify the detail level assignments. and Detail Level Options | 827 . you modify the temporary dimension settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 6 Click OK. for Area. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the final section. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value. notice Window Tags appears twice. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. select meters squared.Number. 30 Under Leader. M_Window Tag . Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. dimensions use these project settings. verify that Create is clear. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 3 In the Format dialog. and Detail Level Options on page 827.

Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts.rvt. click Training Files. click . TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). When you create a new view and specify its view scale. You do not select a view scale to move it. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 12 Click OK. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. and expand 3D Views. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In this table. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In this project. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Type/Discipline. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand each view type. 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click Apply. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 5 On the Views tab. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. select Discipline. expand Sheets (all). expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 8 Select Phase. In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. under Sheets. and click New. and click OK. expand each sheet set. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. click the Folders tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 16 Click the Views tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix.

You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. under Views. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 2 Under Template file. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. If you want to save this file. and click Open. and view names. You can also save these settings in a template file. levels. click Browse. Whenever you create a new project or template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. expand 3D Views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and click OK. and Discipline. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. click Training Files. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter a unique file name. and click OK. You can choose from several templates. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you select the starting point for your office template. you create an office template. View Type (Family and Type).20 In the Browser Organization dialog. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. navigate to your preferred directory. When you create a new template based on an existing template. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. When you create new projects.rte template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Creating an Office Template | 831 . By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. In that case. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. expand Complete. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Proceed to the next lesson. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. dimensions styles. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. the same rules apply. and expand both Architectural and Structural. In the lesson that follows. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 21 In the Project Browser. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. In this lesson. when you create a new project. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. For example. and open Metric\Templates. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials.

navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you can select it now. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 14 Click Open. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create the material. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. In this exercise. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. close them. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Under Template File. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. For example. 9 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.5 In the New Project dialog. 6 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. in the drawing area. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. If you have additional projects open. weights. If you want to use a template other than the default. drag a zoom region around the level heads. and click OK. select Project template. click Browse. and double-click North. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 15 Under Create new. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you modify the project settings for your new template. for Create new. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 7 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 13 Select the default template.

During this exercise. and imported objects. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. When you create or modify a material. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. or refer to the online help. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. 4 Click Replace. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . For more details on modifying these settings. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. For more information. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. and move model patterns. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 13 If necessary. or modify existing patterns. see the previous lesson. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. transparency. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. create new subcategories. create and modify them as needed. annotation objects. and change render appearance properties. including color. the changes are saved as part of the project template. you can set line weights. 9 Click OK when finished. and scroll through the list of categories. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. rotate. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. 2 Scroll down the materials list. texture. You do this by defining the render appearance. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. line patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Modifying System Settings on page 803. and similar attributes. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Observe the materials that are already defined. You can align. If you change render appearance properties. and materials for model objects. In the Object Styles dialog. or refer to the online help. specific modifications are not dictated. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. TIP For more information about creating new materials. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. line colors. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab.

line color. tags. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. To see the details of a particular style. 32 To modify a line pattern. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. and dimensions. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 20 Click OK. create new line subcategories. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 29 Click OK. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. You can add and delete view scales. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 34 Click OK. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. click Duplicate. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. name the style. select it from this list. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and create new subcategories as needed. select it. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and click Edit. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. or line pattern as needed. 18 For existing line categories. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. modify the line weight. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views.15 Modify categories. 19 If necessary. and specify the properties.

57 Specify the Slope option. 53 For Length. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 50 To load new annotation tags. 55 Click OK. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and choose a decimal symbol. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. In the Tags dialog. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. TIP In the drawing area. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.40 Click OK. angular. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. and radial dimensions are modified separately. click Load. name the style. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and Angle settings. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. To see the details of a particular style. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. when you add a door with the tag option selected. click Format. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Linear. and specify the properties. and click OK. Volume. 60 Under Walls. 62 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. For example. select it from this list. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 46 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 58 Click OK. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Duplicate. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list.

create new browser organization types. In a typical project. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. 68 Delete. Using the arrows between the columns. or edit existing organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. See Setting up If necessary. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. rename.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 64 Review the table. 69 If necessary. 73 Click OK. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. Although these settings can be saved within a template. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can find additional information in Help. 72 If necessary. Use the table below as a checklist. However. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. In such a case. and move view scales as needed. rename. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. Medium. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 65 Click OK. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. click the Views tab. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 71 Delete. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. The detail level is based on view scale. Each command is available on the Settings menu. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 70 Click the Sheets tab. click the arrows between columns. or edit existing organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. create new browser organization types. or Fine. To move the view scales.

Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . furniture. and the poche depth. you can move onto the next component type. 2 In the Type Selector. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. click Door. However. you do both. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Although this is possible. you can set up the phases. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. In the steps that follow. title blocks. modify. Although the options are endless. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You can load any family or group into a template. If this selection is satisfactory. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. there are some important thoughts to consider. notice the list of doors already loaded. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you could load detail components. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. phase filters. you can set the default contour line interval. you may want to delete. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Depending on the intended use of this template. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. or add to this selection. If necessary. For example. the section cut material. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. do so before starting this exercise. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. For example. or electrical fixtures. if you load every available window type. or use the Project Browser. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. and electrical fixtures. In addition.

Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. and click Open. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Edit/New. or modify a door. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and click OK. create. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Enter a name. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Select it. Notice that each family category is listed. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Make modifications. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Modify type properties. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. expand Families. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. and click OK.3 To modify. In the Element Properties dialog. click Bar. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. create. or load a new door type. click Edit/New. Click Duplicate.

Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. click 12 Click Preview. (Element Properties). You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you create the views required for your template. In addition. 11 On the Options Bar. To load a title block. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Detail Level. right-click the component. This title block is currently part of the template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. In this exercise. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and click Delete. load.) 10 Expand the title block. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. View Range. and select the title block type. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. create. you created new projects using different templates.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. To do so. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Discipline. click Load. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. 13 Click OK. In addition. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps.

Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and double-click Level 1. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. and apply the appropriate template. double-click South.settings of categories and subcategories. 6 Click OK. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Every time a new plan view is created. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Level 2. In addition. After applying the template. and click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 4 If necessary. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and then click OK. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 11 Click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. select Architectural Plan. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 2 Under Names. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. under Floor Plans. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you will first modify view templates. you can apply a view template to any view. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. select Site Plan. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 12 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Apply. 18 If you modified any other view templates. under Elevations. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and click OK. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. open the view from the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. At any time.

review the existing floor plans. duplicate. 22 In the Project Browser. If prompted. or delete this view. 31 Rename the 3D View. a face. Rename. 27 Create additional levels as needed. and select the desired view. and select the desired direction. 24 On the Options Bar. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. or delete them as needed. Black level heads have no associated views. right-click the ViewCube. 21 In the Project Browser. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. notice that you have the option to rename. right-click Level 1. on the View toolbar. under 3D Views. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and click Save View. review the floor plans. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. in the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. in the shortcut menu. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. expand 3D Views. ceiling plans. use the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. and. To orient the 3D view to another view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and elevations. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. right-click the view name. If it does not display. click Orient to View. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. under Floor Plans. 23 To add more levels to the template. or an edge of the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. click 29 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. duplicate. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you want to modify view properties. (Default 3D View). Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . 30 In the Project Browser. click Orient to a Direction. By default. right-click {3D}. click Level. select Make Plan View. 20 In the Project Browser. enter a view name. click Schedule/Quantities.Notice the level names.

txt for MicroStation). and click Rename. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the title block and delete it. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. modify settings as needed. assign filters. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select one. and click OK. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 Create new sheets as needed. click Add View. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. Select a view. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. You are prompted to select a title block. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the default title block. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. Right-click the sheet name. On the Appearance tab. After the sheet is created. You can still add views to the sheet. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet.You can add schedules to a template.txt for AutoCAD. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. 40 To add views to the sheet. modify settings as needed. expand Sheets (all). To later add a title block to a sheet. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. select the category type. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Sheet. or exportlayersdgn. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. in the Project Browser. and modify their properties accordingly. select and order required fields. On the Filter tab. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click OK. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. To do so. 37 Click OK.

5 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 8 In the dialog. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. When scheduling. select Save As. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When you create a multi-category schedule. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. therefore. for example. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. click Save As. 9 Click Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. You can save these mappings to a text file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. and so on. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. For example. and click Save. and click Save. and click Save. These settings are retained within the project template. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. 2 For each category. Using shared parameters. name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. project parameters. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. doors. windows. and so on. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and they become the set mappings for the project.

Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. you may want to save the file to a network location. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. select a group to add parameters to. 26 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 3 Name and save the file. 2 Click Create. select Project parameter. 25 Click Select. 24 To add a shared project parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. you can create a list of parameters. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. For each parameter group. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 9 Name the parameter. and click OK. 5 Enter the group name. click Add. and specify its discipline and type. because each office has a unique set of needs. If this template will be used by multiple team members. project parameters. enter a parameter name. 18 Under Type of Parameter. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. 19 Under Group parameter under. 6 Create as many groups as needed. If a file already exists. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 14 Click Add. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 11 For each parameter group. 10 Click OK. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. click New. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click New. 8 Under Parameters. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. select a parameter value type. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. select a parameter discipline type. add required parameters. for Name. and select Shared Parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and choose a shared parameter. 21 Under Categories. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 17 Under Discipline.

Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 3 Under Settings. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 4 Modify the printer settings. for Name. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. save the file as a template. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. you can load them into the template. click Setup. or refer to the online help. For information on creating multi-category tags. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click OK. By creating named settings within the template. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. For each printer. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 35 For Name. 32 Navigate to the directory. select the tag. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. The tag is now part of the template. Click OK. 5 Click Save As. paper placement. and click Open. and the percent of actual size. and click OK. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. and print. you create named print settings. 6 In the New dialog. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. make minor modifications if necessary. select Multi-Category. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. By going first to the Print command. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 34 For Category. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 28 Click OK. you need only select a setting. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. click Schedule/Quantities. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 2 Under Printer. In this exercise. enter a name for the schedule. and make it your default template file. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

save it in a network location. In addition. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Click OK. If you have a project. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. 15 Name the template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. If you need to share this file with others. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click Open. 24 Navigate to the template location. you modified settings. 9 In the Print dialog. and click OK.rte). Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 23 For Default template file. 18 Click Browse. Create additional settings as needed. click Browse. In addition. click Save as. select Template Files (*. 19 Select the template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. The only remaining task is to save it. and saved them to a template. and click Save. modify the printer settings. click Setup. enter a new name for the printer. In this lesson. loaded components. 14 Under Save as type. Your template is complete. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. select it. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. You can also set this template as your default template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can provide a good starting point for a template. select a different printer. and click Open. and create new settings for this printer. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 11 Click Close when finished. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 25 Click OK.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful